JP2022183282A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine allowing a player to play a game comfortably.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: game state shift means for shifting a game state from a normal control state to a specific control state; and performance execution means for executing performances in the normal control state and the specific control state. The game state shift means includes a normal control state shift unit for shifting the game state to the normal control state when a specific time has elapsed, after the specific control state is competed. The performance execution means includes: a state-to-state continuation performance execution unit for starting execution of the performance before the specific time elapses after ending the specific control state, and executing multiple types of state-to-state continuation performances that continue execution of the performance even after the specific time has elapsed; and progress processing of a type selection performance for allowing a player to select one of the multiple types of state-to-state continuation performances. The state-to-state continuation performance execution unit starts execution of the performance when allowing the player to select one of the multiple types of state-to-state continuation performances in the progress processing in the type selection performance.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play games comfortably.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area entering the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game ball. and the game state is changed from the normal control state to the specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger. A gaming machine comprising game state transition means for transitioning and effect execution means for executing effects of a normal control state and a specific control state, wherein the game state transition means waits for a specific time to elapse after the specific control state is terminated. A normal control state transition part is provided for shifting to a normal control state as a trigger, and the performance executing means starts execution of the performance before the specific time elapses after the specific control state ends, and the specific time elapses. Continuous production between states that continues execution of production even after the continuous production between states is executed. A continuation performance selecting part for allowing the player to select one of the continuation performances between states, and the continuation performance between states includes a first continuation performance between states for executing a predetermined type of performance and a continuation performance between the first states. A second state-to-state continuous effect for executing a type of effect different from the type of effect is provided, and the inter-state continuous effect execution unit selects one of a plurality of types of inter-state continuous effect by the continuous effect selection unit. It is characterized by starting the execution of the production when it is made to select.

According to the present invention, a player can play a game comfortably.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device Block diagram showing detailed configuration of registers The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing a flow chart of the progress processing of the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of an opening progress process A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device during execution of the type selection effect A diagram showing a flowchart of progress processing of the type selection effect A diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing A diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing A diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device according to a second embodiment of the present invention; A diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing A diagram showing a timing chart of a song A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process according to the third embodiment of the present invention The figure which shows the flowchart of an opening progress process A diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects A diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing A diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of an opening progress process A diagram showing a flowchart of progress processing of the type selection effect A diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing A diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect. The figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening processing which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of an opening progress process A diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects A diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing A diagram showing a flowchart of determination processing of inrush voice A diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects when setting processing for normal rush sound is executed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects when setting processing for delayed entry audio is executed; A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect and the setting processing of the normal rushing sound is executed. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect and the delay rush sound setting process is executed.

[First Embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. This pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted into the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion 23, and includes a speaker unit 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both are provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided in the central portion of the upper plate 25a. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a line, moves them toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
The game board 31, as shown in FIG. 2, has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for guiding game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 has a detection sensor 40a, the upper working opening 36 has a detecting sensor 40b, the lower working opening 37 has a detecting sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detecting sensor 40d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning driving unit 38c is provided.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. and a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a character object display unit 46, and includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and other display devices. arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning to the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
This symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a pattern display. a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47;

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from the start of variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 .

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are in one-to-one correspondence with the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. is provided. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 4).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section is provided with four storage areas, so that up to four winnings of game balls into the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. The first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player left-handedly hits the firing handle 27 with a medium amount of rotational operation, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed as the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the lateral side to the central part, the probability that the game ball will enter the upper operating port 36 rather than the lower operating port 37 becomes higher. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27 set to the maximum, and the position where the game ball reaches in the upper part of the game area is the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the game ball has a higher probability of landing in the lower working opening 37 than in the upper working opening 36. - 特許庁
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can easily cause the game ball to enter the upper working opening 36, and can make it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower working opening 37. 1 route), and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. there is

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a success/failure table storing values of random numbers for winning a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lottery modes, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is.
On the other hand, under the game state in which the win/fail table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 7, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table (see FIG. 4) in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 7A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”, “explicit small-round high-probability result (high-probability result corresponding to few-rounds)”, and “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high-probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 14” are distributed to “unspecified low ``15 to 19'' are assigned to ``Highly Probable Round Results'', and ``20 to 29'' are assigned to ``Most Favorable Results''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 7(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a sorting result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
"Unexplained few rounds high probability result", "Explicit few rounds high probability result", and "Most favorable result" have a high probability of success or failure lottery mode after opening and closing execution mode regardless of the lottery mode before closing execution mode. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit few rounds high probability result” is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery.
The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores random number values associated with occurrence of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 4).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the effective line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the event that a "special failure result" is obtained without becoming, the symbol display device 47 selects a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. A special combination of symbols having numbers different from each other, which will never be displayed, is stopped on the activated line L. - 特許庁

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By causing the stationary display, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates the ready-to-win display, after the variable display is started on the pattern display device 47, and before displaying the predetermined stop result, the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning", It is possible to make the player expect that the lottery will be sorted to the "low probability result" or the "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. These display durations will be described later in detail.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, if the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of 4 pieces, and the first reservation lamp part 49a or the second reservation lamp part 49b is the reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has passed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, the main display section 45 determines whether the variable display is being performed, that is, the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the operation to the upper operation opening 36 is performed. The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 6A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the processing (processing after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 7B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result" , set the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, and if it is specified as "explicit small-round high-probability result", set the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and set the "most favorable result" , then set the best result flag. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in advance in the ROM 63 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result is the "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or "best result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, when winning the ready-to-win generation lottery, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the change type counter obtained from the change type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach display table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, so that the change type counter A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. The display continuation time when the pending information relating to the lower operating port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items relating to the lower operating port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the sorting result, each of the "low probability result", the "non-explicit few round high probability result", the "explicit few round high probability result", and the "best result". contains information.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S811.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the success/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is the "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S807 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", step In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning hole 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning hole 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S809. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S810, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S811) when it is determined that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S801 will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the big winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning opening 38a is open in step S901, it executes the processing after step S906.

First, in step S901, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S903, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S904, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S904 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1002, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1003, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1004, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1005, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC at step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S905 after executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904. This release command contains information about the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the release command includes information related to the number of executions of the round game. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuous time set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S918.

First, the processing (processing after step S907) when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a, in step S908 the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S910 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. This close command contains information about the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closing command includes information related to the number of round game executions. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S917, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S918) when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is a "big hit", it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S923.

First, the process (process after step S921) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S920 will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S922, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S916 described above.

Next, the process (process after step S923) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result" in step S912 or step S920 will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S916 described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S811, the MPU 62 checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S812. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 the value of the timer counter T becomes " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S814, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result for a small number of explicit rounds", it executes the processing from step S1102 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is not the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds", it executes the processing from step S1105 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

At step S1103, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability clear the most favorable result flag) and the special outlier flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Next, processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is not the "most favorable result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1106 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1108.

First, the processing (processing after step S1106) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S<b>1106 , the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes the processes after step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1107. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1108) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1108 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it ends the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1108 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1109.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

At step S1110, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
At step S1112, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result", the game state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Also, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "unexplained small round high probability result", After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends.
The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the opening/closing execution mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening and the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode indicate that the standby time for the ending (specific time) has elapsed after the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) has ended. It functions as a normal control state transition unit that transitions to the normal control state as a trigger.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, and an MPU 92, a ROM 93, and an amplifier circuit 94 mounted on the sound emission control board 91. FIG.

The MPU 92 includes a control core 921, a sound output core 922, a sound data processing section 923, and a memory controller 924, each of which is integrated into one chip.
This MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c , the amplifier circuit 94 and the display control device 100 . The amplifier circuit 94 is connected to the speaker section 24 .

The control core 921 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 60, and executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c according to the determined content of the effect.
Also, the control core 921 executes data setting for the sound output core 922 according to the content of the determined effect. The sound output core 922 executes sound output control according to this data setting.

The control core 921 executes data setting for the sound output core 922 through a data bus SL electrically connecting the control core 921 and the sound output core 922 . The control core 921 and sound output core 922 are capable of two-way communication through this data bus SL. As described above, the control core 921 executes data setting for the sound output core 922 through the data bus SL, and the sound output core 922 transmits to the control core 921 a signal indicating that sound is being output. do.

In addition, the control core 921 transmits to the display control device 100 a command corresponding to the content of the determined effect.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the control core 921 of the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

The control core 921 also includes a CPU 921A as a central processing unit, a RAM 921B, and a DMA (Direct Memory Access) 921C.

The RAM 921B is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. The RAM 921B has various areas such as a command list storage area (not shown). The RAM 921B has a data capacity of many bytes in units of kilobytes or megabytes so as to be able to store and hold a plurality of data simultaneously. Specifically, the RAM 921B has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. This data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the ROM 93 . Note that the data capacity of the RAM 921B is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the control core 921 can suitably execute control.

DMA921C performs the data read-out instruction|indication of ROM93 with respect to the memory controller 924 based on the instruction|indication of CPU921A. Specifically, when the CPU 921A writes the data corresponding to the data read instruction to the internal register of the DMA 921C, the DMA 921C stores the data in the memory controller 924 until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read. Send address data for read instruction. The transmission of this address data is executed in synchronization with a clock signal (for example, 4 MHz) periodically transmitted from a clock circuit incorporated in the DMA 921C.

The sound output core 922 executes sound output control of the speaker unit 24 according to the details of the presentation determined by the control core 921 . The sound output core 922 includes a register 922A, HWD 922B, SCM 922C, and data transfer section 922D.

The register 922A functions as storage means for temporarily storing various data used by the sound output core 922, and is a memory (volatile storage means) that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is configured to be used for both reading and writing. The register 922A has a multi-byte data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes so that it can store a plurality of data simultaneously. Specifically, the register 922A has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. This data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the ROM 93 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 921 B of the control core 921 . Note that the data capacity of the register 922A is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the sound output core 922 can suitably perform control.
Here, as described above, the control core 921 determines the specific content of the performance based on the command received from the main control device 60, and outputs the data setting according to the content of the determined performance by sound. Executes on register 922 A of core 922 .

The HWD 922B creates digital musical tone data for reproducing recorded data sampled in advance. can be played. The recording data may be compressed data such as MP3 or non-compressed data.
The SCM 922C does not create digital musical tone data from recorded data of a predetermined time, but rather creates digital musical tone data by combining rectangular wave data for SCM pre-stored in the ROM 93 in chronological order. It is possible to reproduce the so-called "pico-pico sound".

The HWD 922B and SCM 922C have the function of creating digital musical tone data using the tone data read from the ROM 93 in accordance with the sequence data and parameter data written in the register 922A by the data setting of the control core 921. FIG.
The sequence data includes time data that defines output start timing and output order of a series of sounds.
The parameter data includes sound quality data that defines the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of sound at a predetermined timing.

The sequence data and the parameter data are set as a set of data corresponding to each other, and the HWD 922B and the SCM 922C use the set of sequence data and parameter data to enable a series of sound outputs. there is In addition, the period of sound output determined by one set of sequence data and parameter data is constant regardless of the types of sequence data and parameter data 2.1 sec), which is shorter than the period of Note that the sound output period is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Also, the period of sound output may be configured to be the period of a series of melodies, and in this case, it varies according to the period of the series of melodies.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the registers.
As shown in FIG. 20, the register 922A includes a sequence area 922A1 for temporarily storing the aforementioned sequence data, a parameter area 922A2 for temporarily storing the aforementioned parameter data, an HWD area 922A3, an SCM and a use area 922A4.

The HWD 922B creates digital musical tone data based on HWD recording data stored in the ROM 93, thereby enabling output of recorded sounds. Here, the data transfer unit 922D reads the recording data for HWD stored in the ROM 93 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. is written to the HWD area 922A3.
The HWD area 922A3 has areas for the 1st CH to 16th CH, and enables creation of digital musical tone data based on different recorded data in each CH area. This allows the HWD 922B to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recorded data.

The SCM 922C generates digital musical tone data based on the rectangular wave data for SCM stored in the ROM 93, thereby making it possible to output electronic sounds. Here, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, thereby transferring the rectangular wave data for SCM stored in the ROM 93. Read and write to the SCM area 922A4.
Similar to the HWD area 922A3, the SCM area 922A4 includes a 1st CH area to a 16th CH area, and enables creation of digital musical tone data based on different rectangular wave data in each CH area. This allows the SCM 922C to simultaneously output electronic sounds corresponding to a plurality of different rectangular wave data.

Each of the CH area of the HWD area 922A3 and the CH area of the SCM area 922A4 has an area capable of storing two pieces of digital musical tone data that have already been created. When the HWD 922B and SCM 922C are executing sound output control using the digital musical tone data created in one area, the digital musical tone data corresponding to the next execution period for the execution period of this sound output control is generated. Create in the other area. According to this, the HWD 922B and the SCM 922C can process sound output control and creation of digital musical sound data corresponding to the execution period of the next sound output control in parallel, so sound output can be executed continuously. can be done.

The sound data processing section 923 has a function of synthesizing digital musical sound data created in the HWD area 922A3 and the SCM area 922A4, and a function of a digital/analog converter.
Specifically, when digital musical sound data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas in the HWD area 922A3, the sound data processing unit 923 synthesizes the digital musical sound data, When digital musical tone data are simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas in 922A4, synthesis of the digital musical tone data is executed.
Further, when digital musical sound data is created in each of the HWD area 922A3 and the SCM area 922A4, the sound data processing section 923 synthesizes the digital musical sound data.

Then, the sound data processing section 923 converts the synthesized digital synthesized musical sound data into an analog sound signal and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 94 provided on the sound emission control board 91 .
The amplifier circuit 94 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal output from the sound data processing unit 923 to a level corresponding to the volume set by a volume (not shown), and transmits the amplified analog sound signal to the speaker unit. 24. This allows the speaker section 24 to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds.

ROM 93 is electrically connected to memory controller 924 of MPU 92 via address bus SL1 and data bus SL2, as shown in FIG. This memory controller 924 is electrically connected to the control core 921 via an address bus SL3 and a data bus SL4. Memory controller 924 is also electrically connected to sound output core 922 via address bus SL5 and data bus SL6.

The memory controller 924 receives address data for data read instruction transmitted from the DMA 921C of the control core 921 via the address bus SL3. When the memory controller 924 corresponds to the data read instruction address data transmitted from the DMA 921C, the memory controller 924 transmits the address data to the ROM 93 via the address bus SL1, and transmits the data corresponding to the address data from the ROM 93. Receive via bus SL2. The memory controller 924 then transmits the received data to the RAM 921B of the control core 921 or the internal register of the CPU 921A via the data bus SL4.

The memory controller 924 has a control side address buffer for storing the address data received from the DMA 921C. When the memory controller 924 receives new address data from the DMA 921C while no unprocessed address data is stored in the control-side address buffer, it stores the address data in the control-side address buffer. In this case, memory controller 924 transmits a normal reception signal indicating normal reception of address data to DMA 921C via data bus SL4. The DMA 921C thereby identifies that the address data has been accepted normally. On the other hand, when the memory controller 924 receives new address data from the DMA 921C while unprocessed address data is stored in the control-side address buffer, the memory controller 924 stores the address data in the control-side address buffer. Do not store. In this case, the memory controller 924 does not transmit a normal reception signal indicating normal reception of the address data to the DMA 921C. This identifies that the DMA 921C needs to retransmit the same address data.

The memory controller 924 also receives address data for data readout instruction transmitted from the data transfer section 922D of the sound output core 922 via the address bus SL5. When the memory controller 924 corresponds to the address data for the data read instruction transmitted from the data transfer unit 922D, the memory controller 924 transmits the address data to the ROM 93 via the address bus SL1, and transmits the data corresponding to the address data. It is received from the ROM 93 via the data bus SL2. Memory controller 924 then transmits the received data to register 922A of sound output core 922 via data bus SL6.

The memory controller 924 has a control-side address buffer for storing the address data received from the data transfer section 922D. When the memory controller 924 receives new address data from the data transfer unit 922D in a situation where unprocessed address data is not stored in the control side address buffer, it stores the address data in the control side address buffer. . In this case, memory controller 924 transmits a normal reception signal indicating normal reception of address data to data transfer unit 922D via data bus SL6. Thereby, the data transfer unit 922D identifies that the address data has been received normally. On the other hand, when the memory controller 924 receives new address data from the data transfer unit 922D while unprocessed address data is stored in the control-side address buffer, the memory controller 924 transfers the address data to the control-side address buffer. Do not store in address buffer. In this case, the memory controller 924 does not transmit a normal acceptance signal indicating that the address data has been accepted normally to the data transfer section 922D. Thereby, the data transfer unit 922D identifies that the same address data needs to be retransmitted.

Here, the memory controller 924 incorporates a clock circuit. The memory controller 924 executes predetermined processing in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from this clock circuit.
Note that the cycle of the clock signal of the memory controller 924 is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the DMA 921C and the cycle of the clock signal of the sound output core 922 . Specifically, the period of the clock signal of the memory controller 924 is 15 MHz.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. This ROM 93 has an area for storing the above-described recording data for HWD and rectangular wave data for SCM. Specifically, the ROM 93 has various areas such as a sound storage area 93a and a voice storage area 93b.
The ROM 93 has an area for storing light emission data. This light emission data includes information about the type of lamp portion to be lit among the various lamp portions 23, the lighting period, and the lighting order during a predetermined effect period. In other words, the light emission data defines the content of the light emission pattern of each lamp unit 23, and differs according to the content of the light emission pattern.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, it stores the command in the RAM 921B. Specifically, the RAM 921B has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B to the display control device 100, and transmits various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing for transmission has come, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2113 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2103, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2104, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not the result is “out of normal result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal failure result", that is, the game result is "special failure result", "non-explicit few round high probability result", and "explicit few round high probability result". If it is either, in step S2105, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2103, S2105 and S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that an opening command has been received, in step S2110 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode effect is determined. Effect A is selected as the effect. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S2112, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the opening/closing execution mode effect. In the opening/closing execution mode effect progression processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the opening/closing execution mode effect based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process. Incidentally, the progress processing of the opening/closing execution mode effect will be described later in detail.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in columns and the game states, etc. are arranged in rows.
As shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10, as the game results excluding the "normal failure result", "jackpot win" and "special failure result" results, "non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit It has distribution results of "few rounds high probability result", "best result", and "low probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 23, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the drawing). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" differ in the types of opening and closing execution modes, but they are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, "special outlier results" and "implicit few-round high-probability results" do not transition to support mode. In addition, the symbol display device 47 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped.

Then, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the pattern display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is selected, and the high frequency support mode is set such that the number of game rounds is the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 will cause the opening/closing execution mode effect to be the final effect D in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 does not become a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is in the high probability mode after 100 game rounds are completed. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 function as effect executing means for executing effects in the normal control state and the specific control state.

<Progress processing of effect for open/close execution mode>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of progress processing of the opening/closing execution mode effect.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for advancing the opening/closing execution mode effect in order to advance the opening/closing execution mode effect. In the progress processing of the opening/closing execution mode effect, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 executes opening progress processing. In this opening progress process, the MPU 92 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.
In step S2202, the MPU 92 executes processing for progressing the type selection effect. In this type selection effect progression process, the MPU 92 recognizes the occurrence of the type selection effect and executes a predetermined process. The type selection effect will be described later in detail.

In step S2203, the MPU 92 executes closing progress processing. In this closing progress process, the MPU 92 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.
In step S2204, the MPU 92 executes ending progress processing. In this ending progress process, the MPU 92 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.
The opening progress processing, the type selection effect progress processing, the closing progress processing, and the ending progress processing will be described below in order.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the opening progress process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes opening progress processing when recognizing that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In this opening progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2309 as shown in FIG.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an open command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the opening command has not been received, it ends the opening progress processing without executing the processing after step S2302.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is not the "best result", the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2303.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2306.

First, the processing (processing after step S2303) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is not the "best result" will be described.
In step S2303, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2303 that the game result is not the "low probability result" (the game result is "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", or "explicit small round high probability result") If it is determined to be present), the opening progress process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2304. In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “special loss result”, the “non-explicit small round high probability result”, or the “explicit small round high probability result”, the release sent from the MPU 62 Does not execute command-based effects.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2303 that the game result is the "low-probability result", in step S2304, the normal opening effect determination process is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

At step S2305, the MPU 92 sets a normal opening command including information relating to the normal opening effect selected at step S2304. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal open command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal open command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the opening progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the normal opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

Next, the processing (processing after step S2306) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "best result" will be described.
In step S2306, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 14 or less.
Note that the release command includes information related to the round counter RC, as described above. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the release command includes information related to the number of executions of the round game.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), the processing after step S2304 described above to run.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2307, Type selection effect decision processing is executed. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2308, the MPU 92 sets a type selection command including information related to the type selection effect selected in step S2307. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type selection command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type selection command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the type selection effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the pattern display device 47 executes the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

At step S2309, the MPU 92 sets a type selection flag in the RAM 921B. This type selection flag is a flag for specifying that the type selection effect is being executed. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the opening progress process.
Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area such as the RAM 921B, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the type selection flag by substituting 1 in the type selection flag storage area of the RAM 921B, and clears the type selection flag by substituting 0 in the type selection flag storage area of the RAM 921B.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device during execution of the type selection effect.
Specifically, FIG. 26(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47 when the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and FIG. 26(B). 26(C) shows the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 when the demon type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode is ended. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 47 when the plush toy type is selected as the type;

After the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" (the number of round game executions is determined to be the 15th time), as shown in FIG. 26, the type selection effect is executed.
In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed.

The types of effects after the end of the open/close execution mode are an angel type that employs an angel character as the main character, a devil type that employs a devil character as the main character, and a stuffed animal type that employs a stuffed animal character as the main character. I have.

When the MPU 102 selects the angel type as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 displays an angel character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 26(A). Further, when the MPU 102 selects the devil type as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the devil character is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 26(B). Let Then, when the MPU 102 selects the stuffed animal type as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the stuffed animal character is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 26(C). Let
In the type selection effect, the player can switch between (A) to (C) in FIGS. 26A to 26C by pressing the push button 25b, and can select the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

<Progress processing of type selection effect>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of progress processing of the type selection effect.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for progressing the type selection effect when recognizing the generation of the type selection effect. In this type selection effect progression process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2401 to S2404 as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that the type selection flag is not set in the RAM 921B, it ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B, in step S2402 it determines whether or not the push button 25b has been pressed. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player has pressed the push button 25b in order to select the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

When the MPU 92 determines that the pressing of the push button 25b has not been detected in step S2402, it ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2403.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the pressing of the push button 25b has been detected in step S2402, in step S2403, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the type change effect. In this type change effect determination processing, a table for effect stored in advance in the ROM 93 is referred to, so that the type change effect is performed to inform the player that the effect type has been changed after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. Select the corresponding production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

At step S2404, the MPU 92 sets a type change command including information relating to the type change effect selected at step S2403. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type change command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type change command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the type change effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the type change command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the pattern display device 47 executes the type change effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

In the type selection effect, as described above, the player can switch between (A) to (C) in FIG. be able to. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an angel character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 when the type selection effect is generated (see FIG. 26A).
After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has been pressed, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays a demon character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 (FIG. 26 ( B)). Thereafter, when the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has been pressed, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays a stuffed animal character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 (FIG. 26 ( C)). Thereafter, when the MPU 92 determines that the depression of the push button 25b has been detected, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and causes the angel character to be displayed again on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 (FIG. 26). (A)). In other words, in the type selection effect, the player can loop and switch between FIGS. 26A to 26C by pressing the push button 25b.

<Closing progress processing>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes closing progress processing when recognizing that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state. In this closing progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2501 to S2510 as shown in FIG.

In step S2501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a closing command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has not been received, it ends the closing progress processing without executing the processing after step S2502.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is not the "best result", the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2503.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2506.

First, processing (processing after step S2503) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is not the "best result" will be described.
In step S2503, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2503 that the game result is not the "low probability result" (the game result is "special outlier result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", or "explicit small round high probability result") If it is determined that there is, the closing progress process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2504. In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a “special loss result”, a “non-explicit small round high probability result”, or an “explicit small round high probability result”, the closure sent from the MPU 62 Does not execute command-based effects.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2503 that the game result is the "low-probability result", in step S2504, the MPU 92 executes normal closing effect determination processing. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

At step S2505, the MPU 92 sets a normal closing command including information relating to the normal closing effect selected at step S2504. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal close command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal close command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the closing progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the normal closing effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

Next, the processing (processing after step S2506) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is the "best result" will be described.
In step S2506, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 14 or less.
It should be noted that the closing command contains information relating to the round counter RC, as described above. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closing command includes information related to the number of round game executions.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2506 that the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2" (when it determines that the number of times the round game has been executed is 14 or less), the processing after step S2504 described above is performed. to run.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2507, Execute the determination processing of the type confirmation effect. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2508, the MPU 92 sets a type confirmation command including information related to the type confirmation effect selected in step S2506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type determination command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the type confirmation effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

At step S2509, the MPU 92 clears the type selection flag stored in the RAM 921B.
At step S2510, the MPU 92 sets a flag corresponding to the type determined at step S2507 in the RAM 921B. Specifically, when the MPU 92 specifies that the character finally displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 is an "angel" in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 sets an angel flag, If the character is identified as a "devil", the devil flag is set, and if the character is identified as a "stuffed animal", the stuffed animal flag is set. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the closing progress process.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 92 refers to these flags to determine the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing.
Based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes ending progress processing when recognizing the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In this ending progression process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2608 as shown in FIG.

In step S2601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an ending command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has not been received, it ends the ending progression process without executing the processes after step S2602.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received, in step S2602 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", it executes the processing from step S2603.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2605.

First, the processing (processing after step S2603) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result" will be described.
In step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2604, the MPU 92 sets a normal ending command including information related to the normal ending effect selected in step S2603. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the ending progression process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 the data table for executing the normal ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the pattern display device 47 executes the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

Next, the processing (processing after step S2605) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" will be described.
In step S2605, the MPU 92 executes type determination processing. In this type of determination processing, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the flag (angel flag, devil flag, or stuffed animal flag) set in the RAM 921B in step S2510. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the character is an angel type when the angel flag is set in the RAM 921B, and determines that the character is a devil type when the devil flag is set in the RAM 921B. If the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined to be the stuffed animal type.

In step S2606, the MPU 92 executes song determination processing. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2605. , and perform data settings according to the song.
In step S2607, the MPU 92 executes sound effect determination processing. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects. Specifically, FIG. 30(a) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is determined to be the angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. Fig. 30(c) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is the stuffed animal type in the type determination processing. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the music and sound effects based on the HWD recording data written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2606.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, thereby reproducing the music (HWD recording data) stored in the ROM 93. is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type music piece (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read and written in the first channel area of the HWD area 922A3.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 30(a), starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending. The intro period of the music is "4 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the first channel area of the HWD area 922A3.

The devil type, as shown in FIG. 30(b), starts the intro of the song at the same time as the waiting time for the ending. The intro period of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed toy type, as shown in FIG. 30(c), the intro of the song starts at the same time as the waiting time for the ending. The intro period of the music is "3 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

In addition, the control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the sound effect selected in the sound effect determination process of step S2607.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2 to obtain the sound effects (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. ) is read out and written to the 2nd CH area and the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads the sound (sound effect) that enters the presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode stored in the ROM 93, writes it into the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and stores it in the ROM 93. The right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rush sound and the right-hand instruction sound is based on the end of the opening/closing execution mode (the start of the waiting time for the ending).

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. reads the angel-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it to the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and writes the angel-type right-handed instruction voice (HWD Recorded data) is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 30(a), starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In the case of the angel type, 4 seconds after starting the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the devil-type right-handed instruction voice (HWD recording data) stored in the ROM 93 Recorded data) is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

For the devil type, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the rushing voice starts 3.5 seconds after the waiting time for the ending starts. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, for the devil type, after 5 seconds from the start of the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed animal type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written into the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) Recorded data) is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed animal type, as shown in FIG. 30(c), the rushing voice is started 1.5 seconds after the waiting time for the ending is started. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, in the stuffed animal type, after 3 seconds from the start of the waiting time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

In the present embodiment, the data transfer unit 922D writes music in the 1st CH area of the HWD area 922A3, writes rush sound in the 2nd CH area, and writes right-handed instruction sound in the 3rd CH area. However, it may be written in other CH areas.
Also, in the present embodiment, the music and sound effects are recorded data for HWD, but they may be rectangular wave data for SCM.

Returning to the description of the ending progression process, the processes after step S2608 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the ending progression process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing a special ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S2604, after executing the process of step S2608, or when determining that the ending command is not received in step S2601, the MPU 92 ends the ending progress process.

<About the flow of the special ending>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 31, the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and timing charts during variable display are illustrated below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 31A is a diagram showing the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 31(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 31(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 31, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 14 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed (see FIG. 31(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 31, the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, so the pattern display device 47 causes the display screen G to display an angel character.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode has been completed is determined to be the angel type. (See FIG. 31(B)).

After that, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602, It is determined whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result", in step S2605, the MPU 92 executes type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type) determination processing. do. Then, the MPU 92 executes music determination processing in step S2606 and sound effect determination processing in step S2607. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2605. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

Also, in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 31(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31(B).
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush sound is 2.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The rush voice is set to "Angel mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the standby time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music, as shown in FIG. 31(C).
Further, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the display screen of the symbol display device 47. The variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of G is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31(D).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is uttered by the voice of an angel character, saying "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 32, timing charts for the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 32A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 32(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 32(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 32, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 14 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed (see FIG. 32(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 32, the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, so the pattern display device 47 causes the display screen G to display the devil character.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the devil type is determined as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. (See FIG. 32(B)).

After that, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602, It is determined whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result", in step S2605, the MPU 92 executes type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type) determination processing. do. Then, the MPU 92 executes music determination processing in step S2606 and sound effect determination processing in step S2607. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2605. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

Also, in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 32(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music after 1 sec has elapsed after the end of the waiting time for the ending. become.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 32(B).
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 32, since the demon type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush sound is 3.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The rush voice is set to "Devil mode rush!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 3.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 1 sec has elapsed after the end of the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the demon character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Devil mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 32(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the song when the intro period of the song ends, as shown in FIG. 32(D).
Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 32, since the demon type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, the voice of the devil character is uttered as "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the devil character at the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 33, the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and timing charts during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 33A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 33B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 33(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output. FIG. 33D is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 33(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 14 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed (see FIG. 33(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 33, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the stuffed animal type is determined as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. (See FIG. 33(B)).

After that, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602, It is determined whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result", in step S2605, the MPU 92 executes type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type) determination processing. do. Then, the MPU 92 executes music determination processing in step S2606 and sound effect determination processing in step S2607. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2605. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2605. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

Also, in step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2606 and the sound effect selected in step S2607. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 33(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "3 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music after 3 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending. become.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 33(B).
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 33, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, so the start timing of the rush sound is 1.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The inrush voice is "Into stuffed animal mode!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 1.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 3 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter stuffed animal mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type.
Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music when the period of the intro of the music ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 33(C).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is 3 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, a stuffed animal character utters, "Please start right-handed." Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec after starting the A melody of the music.
In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 33(D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays an image of the stuffed animal character in flight at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ending progression process starts execution of the effect before the waiting time for the ending (specific time) elapses after the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) ends. It functions as a state-to-state continuation performance executing section for executing a plurality of types of special ending performances (state-to-state continuation performances) for continuing the execution of performances even after the waiting time of .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. It also has a devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect (continuous effect during the second state) to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the ending progress process. function as
Note that, in the present embodiment, the effect executing means causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of continuous effects between states before starting the execution of the continuous effect between states by the continuation effect between states execution unit. Although the selector is provided, it may not be provided. In other words, there may be one type of inter-state continuation effect.

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is provided with an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction) and an A melody (music main body) following the intro. . The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type has an intro (music introduction part) and the A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody is different from that of the angel type songs. Alternatively, a stuffed toy type music (second special music) is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ending progression process is performed by performing a special ending effect of an angel type so as to match the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody. start executing.
In the present embodiment, the ending progression process is performed by adjusting the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody. Although the execution of the special ending effect has not started, execution of the devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing. For example, in the devil-type special ending effect, execution of the devil-type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing by setting the standby time for the ending to the same length as the intro period. For example, in the stuffed animal type special ending effect, by delaying the start timing of the intro, execution of the stuffed animal type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is performed after starting the execution of the intro of the angel-type song and before ending the execution of the intro of the angel-type song. An angel-type rush sound (first sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the music. The special ending effect for devil-type or stuffed animal-type music begins after the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music has started, and before the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music ends, A devil type or stuffed toy type rushing sound (second sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the devil type or stuffed toy type music.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the angel-type special ending effect, the execution of the angel-type rushing voice is completed at the same time as the execution of the intro of the angel-type music is completed. In the special ending performance of the devil type or the stuffed animal type, the execution of the intro of the devil type or the stuffed animal type music is finished, and at the same time the execution of the devil type or the stuffed animal type rushing sound is finished.
In the present embodiment, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music sound effect at the same time as the execution of the music introduction part of the special music ends. It is sufficient if the execution of the production is finished at .

Also, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect, after the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, which route of the left-handed route (first route) and the right-handed route (second route) A right-handed instruction sound (path notification sound effect) is provided to notify the player whether the game ball is to be shot toward the player. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after finishing the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type music, and ends the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state. .

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect consists of a video displaying effects around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character flying after this video (video main part). An angel-type image (first special image) is provided. The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type is a video that displays effects around the devil or stuffed animal character (introductory video) and a video of the devil or stuffed animal character flying after this video (main video) A devil type or stuffed animal type image (second special image) is provided.

Also, in the present embodiment, the ending progression process includes the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state), and switching from the image displaying effects around the character to the image of the character flying. The execution of the special ending effect has been started so as to match the timing, but I tried to match the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody and the timing of switching from the image displaying the effects around the character to the image of the character flying. Execution of the special ending effect may be started at . In other words, in the angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character flying may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased. can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effects include special music, sound effects for music, sound effects for route notification, and special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (continuous effect storage between states) that stores a special ending effect. The ROM 93 includes a sound storage area 93a (music storage section) for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music (special music), Voice storage for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices (sound effects) for starting execution of production, and right-handed instruction sounds (sound effects) for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body types and an area 93b (sound effect storage section).

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 start executing the effect before the waiting time for the ending elapses, and even after the waiting time for the ending elapses. Since the ending progress processing for executing the continuing special ending effect is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(2) Since the special ending effect is provided with the special music having the intro and the A melody following the intro, the special music can be continued without switching the special music when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(3) In the ending progression process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody, so that the player can control the timing of switching the game state. , and the timing of switching the melody of the special music can be experienced together. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(4) The special ending effect is to start executing the effect after the intro of the special music starts and before the intro of the special music ends, and before the A melody of the special music starts. , the rush sound can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(5) In the special ending effect, the execution of the rushing voice ends at the same time as the execution of the intro of the special music ends. You can feel it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(6) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the special music is finished, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. The right-handed instruction voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(7) Since the right-handed instruction sound terminates the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.
(8) In the ending progress processing, execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of transition to the normal control state with the timing of switching from the image displaying the effects around the character to the image of the character flying. , the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the scene of the special video. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(9) The special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil-type or stuffed animal-type special ending effect that executes a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. Since it is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.
(10) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 provide a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the ending progression process. Since the progress processing is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(11) The timing of switching from the intro to the A melody in devil-type or stuffed animal-type music is different from the timing of switching from the intro to the A-melody in angel-type music, so the pachinko machine 10 should diversify special ending effects. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
(12) Angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type special ending effects are equipped with angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type rushing voices optimized for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow players to play comfortably.

(13) The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music, and starts execution of effects during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music. A voice storage area 93b for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body type right-handed instruction sounds is provided. Appropriately start execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type right-handed instruction sounds during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type music be able to.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91, an MPU 92, a ROM 93, and an amplifier circuit 94 mounted on the audio emission control board 91. The ROM 93 includes a sound storage area 93a. and various areas such as a voice storage area 93b.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The ROM 93A differs from the first embodiment in that it has various areas such as a sound storage area 93a and does not have a voice storage area 93b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the ending progression process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the ending progression process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing.
Based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes ending progress processing when recognizing the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In this ending progression process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2608 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2608 after executing the music determination process of step S2606, without executing the sound effect determination process of step S2607. different from

In step S2601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an ending command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has not been received, it ends the ending progression process without executing the processes after step S2602.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received, in step S2602 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", it executes the processing from step S2603.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2605.

First, the processing (processing after step S2603) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result" will be described.
In step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93A. .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2604, the MPU 92 sets a normal ending command including information related to the normal ending effect selected in step S2603. Then, the MPU 92 stores the normal ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This normal ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the ending progression process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 the data table for executing the normal ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the pattern display device 47 executes the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

Next, the processing (processing after step S2605) when the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" will be described.
In step S2605, the MPU 92 executes type determination processing. In this type of determination processing, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the flag (angel flag, devil flag, or stuffed animal flag) set in the RAM 921B in step S2510. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the character is an angel type when the angel flag is set in the RAM 921B, and determines that the character is a devil type when the devil flag is set in the RAM 921B. If the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined to be the stuffed animal type.

In step S2606, the MPU 92 executes song determination processing. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93A, thereby determining in step S2605 the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. , and perform data settings according to the song.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music. Specifically, FIG. 36(a) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is determined to be an angel type, and FIG. Fig. 36(c) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is the stuffed animal type in the type determination processing. Also, FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the music based on the HWD recording data written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2606.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, thereby reproducing the music (HWD recording data) stored in the ROM 93A. is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type music piece (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93A is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 36(a), starts the intro of the song at the same time as the waiting time for the ending starts. The intro period of the music is "4 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93A is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The devil type, as shown in FIG. 36(b), starts the intro of the song at the same time as the waiting time for the ending starts. The intro period of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93A is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed toy type, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the intro of the music starts at the same time as the waiting time for the ending. The intro period of the music is "3 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, the entry sound to the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends and the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends are incorporated in the music. Specifically, the rush sound is incorporated in the intro of the song. Also, the right-handed instruction voice is incorporated in the A melody of the music. In other words, the MPU 92 selects a piece of music corresponding to one of the angel type, devil type, and plush toy type in the music determination process of step S2606, thereby performing the intro of the music and the presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. , and the right-handed instruction sound after the end of the open/close execution mode can be output at a specified timing.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 36(a), starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In the case of the angel type, 4 seconds after starting the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

For the devil type, as shown in FIG. 36(b), the rushing voice starts after 3.5 sec from the start of the waiting time for the ending. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, for the devil type, after 5 seconds from the start of the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

In the stuffed toy type, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the rushing voice is started 1.5 seconds after the waiting time for the ending is started. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, in the stuffed animal type, after 3 seconds from the start of the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

In this embodiment, the data transfer unit 922D writes the music to the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3, but it may be written to other CH areas.
Also, in the present embodiment, the music and sound effects are recorded data for HWD, but they may be rectangular wave data for SCM.

Returning to the description of the ending progression process, the processes after step S2608 will be described with reference to FIG.
At step S2608, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information about the music selected at step S2606. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the ending progression process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing a special ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the pattern display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

<About the flow of the special ending>
The flow of the special ending effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 in the first embodiment.

In the special ending effect when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 31(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31(B).
The rush sound (sound effect) is included in the intro of the song, as described above. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush sound is 2.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The rush voice is set to "Angel mode rush!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music, as shown in FIG. 31(C).
Further, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the display screen of the symbol display device 47. The variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of G is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31(D).
The right-handed instruction voice (sound effect) is incorporated in the A melody of the music, as described above. In the example of FIG. 31, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is uttered by the voice of an angel character, saying "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, the rush sound and the right-handed instruction sound are incorporated in the intro and the A melody of the music. and the music excluding the A melody are repeatedly output.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs except for the intro and the A melody. good.

In the special ending effect when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music as shown in FIG. 32(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music after 1 sec has elapsed after the end of the waiting time for the ending. become.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 32(B).
The rush sound (sound effect) is incorporated in the intro of the song, as described above. In the example of FIG. 32, since the demon type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush sound is 3.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The rush voice is set to "Devil mode rush!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 3.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 1 sec has elapsed after the end of the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the demon character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Devil mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 32(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music when the period of the intro of the music ends.
Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.
The right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) is incorporated in the A melody of the music, as described above. In the example of FIG. 32, since the demon type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, the voice of the devil character utters "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the devil character at the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, the rush sound and the right-handed instruction sound are incorporated in the intro and the A melody of the music. and the music excluding the A melody are repeatedly output.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs except for the intro and the A melody. good.

In the special ending effect when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 33(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "3 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music after 3 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending. become.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 33(B).
The rush sound (sound effect) is incorporated in the intro of the song, as described above. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the rush sound is 1.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The inrush voice is set to "Into stuffed animal mode!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 1.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 3 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter stuffed animal mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type.
Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music when the period of the intro of the music ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 33(C).
The right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) is incorporated in the A melody of the music, as described above. In the example of FIG. 33, since the stuffed animal type is selected as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is 3 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, a stuffed animal character utters, "Please start right-handed." Since the period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec after starting the A melody of the music.
In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 33(D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays an image of the stuffed animal character in flight at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, the rush sound and the right-handed instruction sound are incorporated in the intro and the A melody of the music. and the music excluding the A melody are repeatedly output.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs except for the intro and the A melody. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 includes the ROM 93A (inter-state continuation effect storage unit) that stores a special ending effect. The ROM 93A stores angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type music (special music), and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type inrush voices (sound effects) that start performing performances during the execution of the music (special music). Types and information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed toy-type songs into which right-handed instruction sounds (sound effects) of stuffed toy types are inserted are stored.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the functions and effects (1) to (12) of the first embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(14) The ROM 93A provides angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type stuffed-type vocals that start performing performances during the execution of angel-, devil-, and stuffed-type music. Information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type songs into which the right-handed instruction voice is inserted is stored. Execution of devil-type and stuffed animal-type rushing voices and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-things-type right-handed instruction voices can be appropriately started.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the first embodiment, the ending progression process starts execution of the effect before the waiting time for the ending (specific time) elapses after the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) ends, and waits for the ending. A special ending effect (continuous effect between states) that continues the execution of the effect even after the elapse of time was executed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process is a special mode in which execution of the effect is started before the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) is ended, and execution of the effect is continued even after the specific control state is ended. It differs from the first embodiment in that an ending effect (continuous effect between states) is executed.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening opening process is different from that in the first embodiment.
The contents of the big winning opening opening process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that when it is determined in step S1005 that the result of allocation is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds, the processing from step S1008B onwards is executed.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1002, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1003, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1004, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1005, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not the high-probability result for a small number of rounds, it determines in step S1008B whether or not the distribution result is the "best result." .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is not the "best result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result"), in step S1006, the timer counter T is set to " 15000”. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is the "best result", in step S1009B it checks whether the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. judge. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 14 or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), it executes step S1006 described above. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S1009B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S1010B, Set the timer counter T to "1000". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1003, step S1006, or step S1010B, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC at step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Furthermore, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1010B is set to the closed state again after setting the open/close door 38b to the open state in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "best result". It defines the upper limit duration time until setting to Therefore, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit duration to 2 seconds by setting the timer counter T to "1000", as described above.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, the upper limit duration of the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "best result" is the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls. , it is impossible to let 8 game balls enter the big winning hole 38a. In other words, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "best result", the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration time of 2 seconds has elapsed. It will be.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit continuous time of 2 seconds has elapsed. The door 38b may be set in an open state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the opening progression process, the closing progression process, and the ending progression process are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the opening progress processing, the closing progress processing, and the ending progress processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the opening progress process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes opening progress processing when recognizing that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In this opening progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2314B as shown in FIG. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S2302, it executes the processes after step S2306B.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an open command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the opening command has not been received, it ends the opening progress processing without executing the processing after step S2302.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2303 onward in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2306B.

In step S2306B, the MPU 92 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 13 or less.
Note that the release command includes information related to the round counter RC, as described above. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the release command includes information related to the number of executions of the round game.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), the processing after step S2304 described above is performed. to run.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2310B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 14 or less.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), the processing after step S2307 described above to run. In other words, the MPU 92 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the type selection effect determination process when it determines that the round game has been executed for the 14th time.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2311B, Perform type determination processing. In this type of determination processing, the MPU 92 determines the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the flag (angel flag, devil flag, or stuffed animal flag) set in the RAM 921B in step S2510. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the character is an angel type when the angel flag is set in the RAM 921B, and determines that the character is a devil type when the devil flag is set in the RAM 921B. If the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined to be the stuffed animal type.
The MPU 92 sets the angel flag, the devil flag, or the stuffed animal flag in the RAM 921B at step S2510 of the closing progress process in the 14th round game (see FIG. 40).

In step S2312B, the MPU 92 executes song determination processing. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song.
In step S2313B, the MPU 92 executes sound effect determination processing. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 39 is a timing chart of music and sound effects. Specifically, FIG. 39(a) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. FIG. 39(c) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is the stuffed animal type in the type determination processing. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the music and sound effects based on the HWD recording data written in the 1st to 3rd CH areas of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2312B.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, thereby reproducing the music (HWD recording data) stored in the ROM 93. is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type music piece (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read and written in the first channel area of the HWD area 922A3.

As for the angel type, as shown in FIG. 39(a), at the same time as starting the 15th round game, the intro of the music is started. The intro period of the music is "6 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the first channel area of the HWD area 922A3.

For the devil type, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the intro of the music starts at the same time as the 15th round game starts. The intro period of the music is "7 sec", and after the intro of the music ends, the A melody of the music starts.

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed animal type, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the intro of the song starts at the same time as the 15th round game starts. The intro period of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

Also, the control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the sound effect selected in the sound effect determination process of step S2313B.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2 to obtain the sound effects (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. ) is read out and written to the 2nd CH area and the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads the sound (sound effect) that enters the presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode stored in the ROM 93, writes it into the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and stores it in the ROM 93. The right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the rush sound and the right-hand instruction sound is different from the first embodiment in that the start timing of the fifteenth round game is used as a reference.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. reads the angel-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 and writes it to the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and writes the angel-type right-handed instruction voice (HWD Recorded data) is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 39(a), starts the rush sound 4.5 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, the angel type starts the right-handed instruction voice 6 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the devil-type right-handed instruction voice (HWD recording data) stored in the ROM 93 Recorded data) is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As for the devil type, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the rush sound is started after 5.5 seconds from the start of the 15th round game. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In the case of the devil type, the right-handed instruction voice is started after 7 seconds from the start of the 15th round game. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed animal type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written into the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3, and the stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) Recorded data) is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed toy type, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the rushing sound is started 3.5 seconds after the 15th round game is started. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".
In addition, in the stuffed animal type, the right-handed instruction voice is started 5 seconds after the 15th round game is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

Returning to the description of the opening progress processing, the processing after step S2314B will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the opening progress process. In other words, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that when it is determined that the number of times the round game has been executed is the 15th, the music determination process, the sound effect determination process, and the setting of the special ending command are performed. different.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing a special ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

<Close progress processing>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes closing progress processing when recognizing that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state. In this closing progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2501 to S2510 as shown in FIG. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2506B onwards.

In step S2501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a closing command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has not been received, it ends the closing progress processing without executing the processing after step S2502.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2503 onward in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2502 that the game result is the "best result", it executes the processing from step S2506B.

In step S2506B, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 13 or less.
It should be noted that the closing command includes information related to the round counter RC, as described above. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closing command includes information related to the number of round game executions.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 13 times or less), the processing after step S2504 described above is performed. to run.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or more), in step S2511B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 14 or less.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2511B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), the processing after step S2507 described above is performed. to run. In other words, the MPU 92 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the determination processing of the type confirmation effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 14th.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is not greater than or equal to "2" (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the closing progress process is executed. finish.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing.
Based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes ending progress processing when recognizing the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In this ending progression process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2604 as shown in FIG. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 92 terminates the ending progression process when it determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S2602.

<About the flow of the special ending>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 42, the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and timing charts during variable display are illustrated below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 42A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 42B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 42(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 42D is a diagram showing the display screen G when outputting the right-handed instruction sound.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 42, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2310B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), the MPU 92 determines the type selection effect. Execute the process. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when determining that the round game execution count is the 14th, the MPU 102 displays the round game execution count at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "ROUND14" are displayed (see FIG. 42(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 42, the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, so the pattern display device 47 displays an angel character on the display screen G.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2511B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), it determines the type confirmation effect. Execute the process. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode has been completed is determined to be the angel type. (See FIG. 42(B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2311B, the type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type). Then, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2312B and a sound effect determination process in step S2313B. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

Also, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 42(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "6 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music at the same time as the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 42(B).
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 42, since the angel type is selected as the effect type after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the start timing of the rush voice is 4.5 seconds after the start of the fifteenth round game. Yes, and the rush voice is "Angel mode rush!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound 4.5 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music, as shown in FIG. 42(C).
Further, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the display screen of the symbol display device 47. The variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the reduced display arranged at the lower left position of G is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 42(D).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 42, since the angel type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open/close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 6 seconds after the start of the fifteenth round game. be. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is uttered by the voice of an angel character, saying "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 43, timing charts for the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 43A is a diagram showing the display screen G before the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
FIG. 43B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 43C is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending. FIG. 43(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 43(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 43, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2310B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), the MPU 92 determines the type selection effect. Execute the process. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when determining that the round game execution count is the 14th, the MPU 102 displays the round game execution count at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "ROUND14" are displayed (see FIG. 43(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 43, the devil type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, so the pattern display device 47 displays the devil character on the display screen G.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2511B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), it determines the type confirmation effect. Execute the process. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the devil type is determined as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. (See FIG. 43(B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2311B, the type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type). Then, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2312B and a sound effect determination process in step S2313B. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

Also, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 43(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "7 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music after 1 sec has elapsed after the end of the waiting time for the ending. become.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 43(B).
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 43, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open/close execution mode, the start timing of the rush sound is 5.5 seconds after the start of the fifteenth round game. Yes, and the rush voice is "Devil mode rush!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound 5.5 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 1 sec has elapsed after the end of the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the demon character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Devil mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 43(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the song when the intro period of the song ends, as shown in FIG. 43(D).
Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 43, since the devil type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 7 seconds after the start of the fifteenth round game. be. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, the voice of the devil character is uttered as "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the devil character at the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 44, timing charts for the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 44A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 44B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 44(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output. FIG. 44D is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for ending.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 44, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2310B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), the MPU 92 determines the type selection effect. Execute the process. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when determining that the round game execution count is the 14th, the MPU 102 displays the round game execution count at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "ROUND14" are displayed (see FIG. 44(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 44, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2511B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), it determines the type confirmation effect. Execute the process. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the stuffed animal type is determined as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. (See FIG. 44(B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2311B, the type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type). Then, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2312B and a sound effect determination process in step S2313B. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select a sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

Also, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the music selected in step S2312B and the sound effect selected in step S2313B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 44(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music at the same time as starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the intro period of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music after 3 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending. become.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 44(B).
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 44, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode, so the rush voice start timing is 3.5 seconds after the start of the fifteenth round game. Yes, and the inrush voice is "Into stuffed animal mode!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound 3.5 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 3 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter stuffed animal mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type.
Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the A melody of the music when the period of the intro of the music ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 44(C).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 44, since the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of effect after the end of the open/close execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 seconds after the start of the 15th round game. be. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, a stuffed animal character utters, "Please start right-handed." Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 1 sec after starting the A melody of the music.
In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 44(D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays an image of the stuffed animal character in flight at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process starts the execution of the effect before the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) is ended, and continues the execution of the effect even after the specific control state is ended. It functions as a state-to-state continuation effect executing section that executes a continuation effect (special ending effect).

Further, in this embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter. It functions as opening/closing ball entry means for putting out a predetermined game ball at the time. In the open/close execution mode, one game (round game) is performed from setting the variable winning device 38 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again, and after setting the variable winning device 38 to the open state, It is provided with a final specific game (15th round game) that sets the closed state again only when the time has elapsed. In the opening progression process, after starting the final specific game, execution of the effect is started before finishing the final specific game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. It also has a devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect (continuous effect during the second state) to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the opening progress process. function as
Note that, in the present embodiment, the effect executing means causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of continuous effects between states before starting execution of the continuous effect between states by the continuation effect between states execution unit. Although the selector is provided, it may not be provided. In other words, there may be one type of inter-state continuation effect.

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is provided with an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction) and an A melody (music main body) following the intro. . The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type has an intro (music introduction part) and the A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody is different from that of the angel type songs. Alternatively, a stuffed toy type music (second special music) is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process is performed by performing a special angel-type ending so as to match the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody. start executing.
In the present embodiment, the release progression process is performed by adjusting the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state) and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody. Although the execution of the special ending effect has not started, execution of the devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing. For example, in the devil-type special ending effect, execution of the devil-type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing by setting the waiting time for the ending to the same length as the intro period. For example, in the stuffed animal type special ending effect, by delaying the start timing of the intro, execution of the stuffed animal type special ending effect may be started so as to match each timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is performed after starting the execution of the intro of the angel-type song and before ending the execution of the intro of the angel-type song. An angel-type rush sound (first sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the music. The special ending effect for devil-type or stuffed animal-type music begins after the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music has started, and before the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music ends, A devil type or stuffed toy type rushing sound (second sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the devil type or stuffed toy type music.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the angel-type special ending effect, the execution of the angel-type rushing voice is completed at the same time as the execution of the intro of the angel-type music is completed. In the special ending performance of the devil type or the stuffed animal type, the execution of the intro of the devil type or the stuffed animal type music is finished, and at the same time the execution of the devil type or the stuffed animal type rushing sound is finished.
In the present embodiment, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music sound effect at the same time as the execution of the music introduction part of the special music ends. It is only necessary that the execution of the production is finished at .

Also, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect, after the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, which route of the left-handed route (first route) and the right-handed route (second route) A right-handed instruction sound (path notification sound effect) is provided to notify the player whether the game ball is to be shot toward the player. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after finishing the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type music, and ends the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state. .

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect consists of a video displaying effects around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character flying after this video (video main part). An angel-type image (first special image) is provided. The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type is a video that displays effects around the devil or stuffed animal character (introductory video) and a video of the devil or stuffed animal character flying after this video (main video) A devil type or stuffed animal type image (second special image) is provided.

Also, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process includes the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state), and switching from the image displaying effects around the character to the image of the character flying. The execution of the special ending effect has been started so as to match the timing, but I tried to match the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody and the timing of switching from the image displaying the effects around the character to the image of the character flying. Execution of the special ending effect may be started at . In other words, in the angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character flying may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased. can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effects include special music, sound effects for music, sound effects for route notification, and special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (continuous effect storage between states) that stores a special ending effect. The ROM 93 includes a sound storage area 93a (music storage section) for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music (special music), Voice storage for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type rushing voices (sound effects) for starting execution of the production, and angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instruction voices (sound effects) and an area 93b (sound effect storage section).
In this embodiment, the ROM 93 includes a music storage section for storing information related to special music and a sound effect storage section for storing information related to sound effects. Information relating to a special music piece into which a sound effect for starting execution is inserted may be stored in a single storage unit.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 start executing an effect before ending the opening/closing execution mode, and execute a special ending effect that continues the execution of the effect even after ending the opening/closing execution mode. Since the opening progress processing is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The 15th round game ends only when the predetermined time has passed, and the opening/closing progress process is performed after the 15th round game starts and before the 15th round game ends. is started, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(3) Since the special ending effect is provided with the special music having the intro and the A melody following the intro, the special music can be continued without switching the special music when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(4) In the opening progression process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody, so the player can easily match the timing of switching the game state. , and the timing of switching the melody of the special music can be experienced together. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(5) A special ending effect is produced after starting the execution of the intro of the special music, before finishing the execution of the intro of the special music, and before starting the A melody of the special music. , the rush sound can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(6) In the special ending effect, the execution of the rushing voice ends at the same time as the execution of the intro of the special music ends. You can feel it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(7) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the special music is finished, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. The right-handed instruction voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(8) Since the right-handed instruction sound terminates the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.
(9) In the opening progression process, the execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state with the timing of switching from the image displaying the effects around the character to the image of the character flying. , the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the scene of the special video. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(10) The special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil-type or stuffed animal-type special ending effect that executes a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. Since it is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the opening progression process. Since the progress processing is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(12) The timing of switching from the intro to the A melody in devil type or stuffed animal type music differs from the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody in angel type music, so the pachinko machine 10 should diversify special ending effects. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
(13) Angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type special ending effects are equipped with angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type rushing voices optimized for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(14) The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music, and starts execution of effects during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music. Since it is provided with a voice storage area 93b for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type incoming voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body type right-handed instruction sounds, the opening progression process can be performed by: Appropriately start execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type right-handed instruction sounds during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type music be able to.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the first embodiment, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the song at the same time as starting the waiting time for the ending.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 92 detects that the push button 25b is pressed, and each time the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode is switched, the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is changed. is different from the first embodiment in that the intro of is started.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening opening process is different from that in the first embodiment.
The contents of the big winning opening opening process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that when it is determined in step S1005 that the result of allocation is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds, the processing from step S1008B onwards is executed.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1002, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1003, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1004, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1005, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not the high-probability result for a small number of rounds, it determines in step S1008B whether or not the distribution result is the "best result." .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is not the "best result" (when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result"), in step S1006, the timer counter T is set to " 15000”. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1008B that the distribution result is the "best result", in step S1009B it checks whether the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more. judge. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number of round game executions is 14 or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), it executes step S1006 described above. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S1009B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S1010B, Set the timer counter T to "1000". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1003, step S1006, or step S1010B, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC at step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Furthermore, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1010B is set to the closed state again after setting the open/close door 38b to the open state in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "best result". It defines the upper limit duration time until setting to Therefore, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit duration to 2 seconds by setting the timer counter T to "1000", as described above.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, the upper limit duration of the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "best result" is the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls. , it is impossible to let 8 game balls enter the big winning hole 38a. In other words, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit continuous time of 2 seconds has elapsed. It will be.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit continuous time of 2 seconds has elapsed. The door 38b may be set in an open state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the opening progression process, the type selection effect progression process, the closing progression process, and the ending progression process are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the opening progress processing, the type selection effect progress processing, the closing progress processing, and the ending progress processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of opening progress processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes opening progress processing when recognizing that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In this opening progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2317C as shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 differs from the first embodiment in that after executing the processing of step S2309, the processing of step S2315C and subsequent steps is executed.

In step S2315C, the MPU 92 executes song determination processing. In the song determination process, the MPU 92 selects a song corresponding to the angel type by referring to HWD recording data pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, and executes data setting according to the song. do.
In step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes sound effect determination processing. In the sound effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to HWD recording data pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, and stores data corresponding to the sound effect. Run the settings.

At this time, the remaining time from the generation of the type selection effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush sound is determined to be 0.5 sec by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from the initial state of 2.5 sec.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2317C, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2315C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the opening progress process.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing a special ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

<Progress processing of type selection effect>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of progress processing of the type selection effect.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for progressing the type selection effect when recognizing the generation of the type selection effect. In this type selection effect progression process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2401 to S2408C as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 differs from the first embodiment in that after executing the process of step S2404, the process of step S2405C and subsequent steps is executed.

In step S2401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that the type selection flag is not set in the RAM 921B, it ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that the type selection flag is set in the RAM 921B, in step S2402 it determines whether or not the push button 25b has been pressed. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player presses the push button 25b in order to select the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the MPU 92 determines that the pressing of the push button 25b has not been detected in step S2402, it ends the progress processing of the type selection effect without executing the processing after step S2403.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the pressing of the push button 25b has been detected in step S2402, in step S2403, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the type change effect. In this type change effect determination process, a table for effect stored in advance in the ROM 93 is referred to, so that the type change effect is performed to inform the player that the effect type has been changed after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. Select the corresponding production pattern.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

At step S2404, the MPU 92 sets a type change command including information relating to the type change effect selected at step S2403. Then, the MPU 92 stores the type change command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This type change command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the type change effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the type change command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the pattern display device 47 executes the type change effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

In the type selection effect, as described above, the player can switch between (A) to (C) in FIG. be able to. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an angel character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 when the type selection effect is generated (see FIG. 26A).
After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has been pressed, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays a demon character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 (FIG. 26 ( B)). Thereafter, when the MPU 92 determines that the push button 25b has been pressed, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and displays a stuffed animal character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 (FIG. 26 ( C)). Thereafter, when the MPU 92 determines that the depression of the push button 25b has been detected, the MPU 102 executes a type change effect and causes the angel character to be displayed again on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 (FIG. 26). (A)). In other words, in the type selection effect, the player can loop and switch between FIGS. 26A to 26C by pressing the push button 25b.

In step S2405C, the MPU 92 executes type determination processing. In this type of determination processing, the MPU 92 determines the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the character is an angel type when the angel flag is set in the RAM 921B, and determines that the character is a devil type when the devil flag is set in the RAM 921B. If the stuffed animal flag is set in the RAM 921B, it is determined to be the stuffed animal type.
The MPU 92 sets an angel flag in the RAM 921B when the type selection effect occurs, and stores a flag (angel flag , devil flag, or rag flag).

In step S2406C, the MPU 92 executes music re-determination processing. In the music redetermining process, the MPU 92 refers to the recording data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to correspond to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode changed in the type change presentation. re-select the song to be played, and execute data setting according to the song.
In step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes sound effect redetermination processing. In the sound effect re-determining process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to select the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode changed in the type change effect. Reselect the corresponding sound effect and execute data setting according to the sound effect.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, for example, the MPU 92 detects that the push button 25b is pressed only once after 1 second has passed since the generation of the type selection effect, generates the type change effect, and performs the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. When the devil type is selected as the type, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from 2 sec, which is the upper limit continuous time of the fifteenth round game, is subtracted as the advance time from the start timing of the rush voice. Therefore, the start timing of the rushing voice is re-determined at 2.5 sec by subtracting 1 sec, which is the advance time, from the initial state of 3.5 sec.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2408C, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music re-determined in step S2406C and the sound effect re-determined in step S2407C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special ending command in the command list stored in the command list storage area of the RAM 921B. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above. After that, the MPU 92 ends the progress processing of the type selection effect.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing a special ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

<Closing progress processing>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes closing progress processing when recognizing that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state. In this closing progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2501 to S2509 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 differs from the first embodiment in that it does not execute the process of step S2510.

<Ending progress processing>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ending progress processing.
Based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes ending progress processing when recognizing the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In this ending progression process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2604 as shown in FIG. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 92 terminates the ending progression process when it determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S2602.

<About the flow of the special ending>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 50, timing charts for the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 50A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 50B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 50(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 50(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 50, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 14 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed (see FIG. 50(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 50, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern display device 47 causes the display screen G to display an angel character.

Here, when the type selection effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2315C, and refers to the recorded data for the HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to select the angel type. Select the corresponding music and execute data setting according to the music.

Then, in step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes sound effect determination processing, and selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to HWD recording data stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. , execute the data setting according to the sound effect.
At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the fifteenth round game, from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush sound is determined to be 0.5 sec by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the fifteenth round game, from the initial state of 2.5 sec.

Further, when the type change effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes the process of redetermining the music in step S2406C, and refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to generate the type change effect. , the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the end of the changed opening/closing execution mode is selected again, and data setting corresponding to the music is executed. In other words, in the type selection effect, each time the MPU 92 switches the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends by detecting the depression of the push button 25b, the music corresponding to the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends is played. Let the intro begin.

In the example of FIG. 50, the MPU 92 detects the third depression of the push button 25b when 1 sec has passed since the type selection effect was generated, generates the type change effect, and selects the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This is explained assuming that the angel type is selected. Therefore, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music when 1 sec has passed after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music 1 sec before the end of the waiting time for the ending.

Then, in step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes processing for redetermining the sound effect, and by referring to the recorded data for the HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, the opening/closing execution changed by the type change effect. A sound effect corresponding to the type of presentation after mode termination is selected again, and data setting corresponding to the sound effect is executed.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, in the example of FIG. 50, the MPU 92 detects the third depression of the push button 25b when 1 sec has passed since the type selection effect was generated, generates the type change effect, and terminates the opening/closing execution mode. Since the angel type is selected as the type of subsequent performance, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from 2 sec, which is the upper limit continuous time of the 15th round game, is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rushing voice is re-determined at 1.5 sec by subtracting 1 sec, which is the advance time, from the initial state of 2.5 sec.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode has been completed is determined to be the angel type. (See FIG. 50(B)).

Also, in step S2317C or step S2408C, MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2315C or step S2406C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C or step S2407C. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 50(B), starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 50, the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the advancing time is 1 sec. After 5 seconds, the rushing sound is "Angel mode rushing!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 1.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice 1 sec before the end of the waiting time for the ending.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 50(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 50(D).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 50, since the angel type is selected as the effect type after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice at the same time when the intro period of the music ends.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is uttered by the voice of an angel character, saying "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the devil type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 51, the opening/closing execution mode, the waiting time for the ending, and the timing chart during the variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is added to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 51A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 51(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 51(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 51, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 14 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed (see FIG. 51(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 51, the devil type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, so the pattern display device 47 causes the display screen G to display a devil character.

Here, when the type selection effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2315C, and refers to the recorded data for the HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to select the angel type. Select the corresponding music and execute data setting according to the music.

Then, in step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes sound effect determination processing, and selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to HWD recording data stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. , execute the data setting according to the sound effect.
At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the fifteenth round game, from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush sound is determined to be 1.5 sec by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the fifteenth round game, from the initial state of 3.5 sec.

Further, when the type change effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes the process of redetermining the music in step S2406C, and refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to generate the type change effect. , the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the end of the changed opening/closing execution mode is selected again, and data setting corresponding to the music is executed. In other words, in the type selection effect, each time the MPU 92 switches the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends by detecting the depression of the push button 25b, the music corresponding to the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends is played. Let the intro begin.

In the example of FIG. 51, the MPU 92 detects the first depression of the push button 25b when 1 second has passed since the type selection effect was generated, generates the type change effect, and selects the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. I will explain assuming that the devil type is selected as. Therefore, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music when 1 sec has passed after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music and starts the A melody of the music at the same time as the waiting time for the ending ends.

Then, in step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes processing for redetermining the sound effect, and by referring to the recorded data for the HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, the opening/closing execution changed by the type change effect. A sound effect corresponding to the type of presentation after mode termination is selected again, and data setting corresponding to the sound effect is executed.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advance time.
Specifically, in the example of FIG. 51, the MPU 92 detects the first depression of the push button 25b when 1 sec has passed since the generation of the type selection effect, generates the type change effect, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. Since the devil type is selected as the type of subsequent performance, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from 2 sec, which is the upper limit continuous time of the 15th round game, is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rushing voice is re-determined at 2.5 sec by subtracting 1 sec, which is the advance time, from the initial state of 3.5 sec.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the devil character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the devil type is determined as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. (See FIG. 51(B)).

Also, in step S2317C or step S2408C, MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2315C or step S2406C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C or step S2407C. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 51(B), starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 51, the devil type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the advance time is 1 sec. After 5 sec, the inrush voice is "Enter devil mode!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the demon character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Devil mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the devil type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 51(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 51(D).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 51, since the demon type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice one second after the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, the voice of the devil character is uttered as "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 1.5 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the devil character at the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device when the plush toy type is selected in the type selection effect. In FIG. 52, the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and timing charts during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 52A is a diagram showing the display screen G before the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
FIG. 52B is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 52(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output. FIG. 52(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 52, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is 14 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2306 (when it determines that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time), the type selection effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th, the MPU 102 indicates the number of executions of the round game at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "FINAL ROUND" are displayed (see FIG. 52(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 52, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, when the type selection effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2315C, and refers to the recorded data for the HWD stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to select the angel type. Select the corresponding music and execute data setting according to the music.

Then, in step S2316C, the MPU 92 executes sound effect determination processing, and selects a sound effect corresponding to the angel type by referring to HWD recording data stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93. , execute the data setting according to the sound effect.
At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type selection effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time.
Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the fifteenth round game, from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush sound is −0.5 sec (0.5 sec before the end of the open/close execution mode), which is obtained by subtracting 2 sec, which is the upper limit duration of the 15th round game, from the initial state of 1.5 sec. is determined by

Further, when the type change effect is generated, the MPU 92 executes the process of redetermining the music in step S2406C, and refers to the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93 to generate the type change effect. , the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the end of the changed opening/closing execution mode is selected again, and data setting corresponding to the music is executed. In other words, in the type selection effect, each time the MPU 92 switches the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends by detecting the depression of the push button 25b, the music corresponding to the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends is played. Let the intro begin.

In the example of FIG. 52, the MPU 92 detects the second pressing of the push button 25b when 1 sec has passed since the type selection effect was generated, generates the type change effect, and selects the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is assumed that the plush toy type is selected. Therefore, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music when 1 sec has passed after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the introduction of the music is "3 sec", the MPU 92 ends the introduction of the music and starts the A melody of the music 2 seconds before the end of the waiting time for the ending.

Then, in step S2407C, the MPU 92 executes processing for redetermining the sound effect, and by referring to the recorded data for the HWD stored in advance in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, the opening/closing execution changed by the type change effect. A sound effect corresponding to the type of presentation after mode termination is selected again, and data setting corresponding to the sound effect is executed.

At this time, the remaining time from the occurrence of the type change effect to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted from the start timing of the rush sound as the advancing time.
Specifically, in the example of FIG. 52, the MPU 92 detects the second depression of the push button 25b when 1 sec has passed since the generation of the type selection effect, generates the type change effect, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. Since the stuffed animal type is selected as the type of subsequent performance, 1 sec, which is the remaining time obtained by subtracting this 1 sec from 2 sec, which is the upper limit continuous time of the 15th round game, is subtracted from the start timing of the rush voice as the advancing time. Therefore, the start timing of the rush sound is re-determined at 0.5 sec by subtracting 1 sec, which is the advance time, from the initial state of 1.5 sec.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2506 (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), the type confirmation effect is executed. Execute decision processing. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the stuffed animal type is determined as the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends. (See FIG. 52(B)).

Also, in step S2317C or step S2408C, MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information on the music selected in step S2315C or step S2406C and the sound effect selected in step S2316C or step S2407C. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music and sound effects selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 52(B), starts the rush sound to the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends.
The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 52, the stuffed toy type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the advance time is 1 sec. After 5 sec, the inrush voice is "Into the stuffed animal mode!". In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 0.5 sec after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice after 2 seconds have elapsed after starting the waiting time for the ending.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the stuffed animal character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter stuffed animal mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the stuffed toy type.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 52(C).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 52, since the stuffed animal type is selected as the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is 3 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction voice one second after the end of the intro period of the music.
Here, as the right-handed instruction voice, a stuffed animal character utters, "Please start right-handed." Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 2 seconds after starting the A melody of the music.
In other words, the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice at the same time as the end of the waiting time for the ending.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 92 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 52(D). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays an image of the stuffed animal character in flight at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process and the progression process of the type selection effect start execution of the effect before the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) ends, and the effect continues even after the specific control state ends. It functions as a state-to-state continuation performance execution unit that executes a state-to-state continuation performance (special ending performance) that continues the execution of.
In addition, after the opening and closing execution mode (specific control state) ends, the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the effect before the waiting time for the ending (specific time) elapses, and the waiting time for the ending A special ending effect (continuous effect between states) may be executed in which the execution of the effect is continued even after the lapse of time.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter. It functions as opening/closing ball entry means for putting out a predetermined game ball at the time. In the open/close execution mode, one game (round game) is performed from setting the variable winning device 38 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again, and after setting the variable winning device 38 to the open state, It is provided with a final specific game (15th round game) that sets the closed state again only when the time has elapsed. In the opening progression process, after starting the final specific game, execution of the effect is started before finishing the final specific game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. It also has a devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect (continuous effect during the second state) to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the ending progress process. function as
Further, the opening progress processing and the progress processing of the type selection effect start to be executed when the player selects one of a plurality of types of special ending effects in the progress processing of the type selection effect.

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is provided with an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction) and an A melody (music main body) following the intro. . The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type has an intro (music introduction part) and the A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody is different from that of the angel type songs. Alternatively, a stuffed toy type music (second special music) is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is performed after starting the execution of the intro of the angel-type song and before ending the execution of the intro of the angel-type song. An angel-type rush sound (first sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the music. The special ending effect for devil-type or stuffed animal-type music begins after the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music has started, and before the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music ends, A devil type or stuffed toy type rushing sound (second sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the devil type or stuffed toy type music.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the angel-type special ending effect, the execution of the angel-type rushing voice is completed at the same time as the execution of the intro of the angel-type music is completed. In the special ending effect of the devil type or the stuffed animal type, the execution of the intro of the devil type or the stuffed animal type music is finished, and at the same time the execution of the devil type or the stuffed animal type rushing sound is finished.
In the present embodiment, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music sound effects at the same time as the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music ends. It is only necessary that the execution of the production is finished at .

Also, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect, after the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, which route of the left-handed route (first route) and the right-handed route (second route) A right-handed instruction sound (path notification sound effect) is provided to notify the player whether the game ball is to be shot toward the player. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after finishing the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type music, and ends the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state. .

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect consists of a video displaying effects around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character flying after this video (video main part). An angel-type image (first special image) is provided. The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type is a video that displays effects around the devil or stuffed animal character (introductory video) and a video of the devil or stuffed animal character flying after this video (main video) A devil type or stuffed animal type image (second special image) is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process and the progression process of the type selection effect include the timing of ending the standby time for the ending (timing of shifting to the normal control state), The execution of a special ending effect has been started to match the timing of switching to the image in flight, but the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody and the image of the character flying from the image displaying effects around the character Execution of a special ending effect may be started so as to coincide with the timing of switching to . In other words, in the angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character flying may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased. can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effects include special music, sound effects for music, sound effects for route notification, and special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (continuous effect storage between states) that stores a special ending effect. The ROM 93 includes a sound storage area 93a (music storage section) for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music (special music), Voice storage for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices (sound effects) for starting execution of production, and right-handed instruction sounds (sound effects) for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body types and an area 93b (sound effect storage section).

In this embodiment, the ROM 93 includes a music storage section for storing information related to special music and a sound effect storage section for storing information related to sound effects. Information relating to a special music piece into which a sound effect for starting execution is inserted may be stored in a single storage unit.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 start executing an effect before ending the opening/closing execution mode, and execute a special ending effect that continues the execution of the effect even after ending the opening/closing execution mode. Since the opening progress processing and the progress processing of the type selection performance are provided, the performance can be continued without switching the performance when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The 15th round game ends only when a predetermined time has passed, and the opening/closing progress processing and the type selection effect progress processing are performed in the 15th round after the start of the 15th round game. Since the performance is started before ending the game, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(3) The opening progression process and the progress process of the type selection effect start execution of the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of special ending effects in the progress process of the type selection effect. The machine 10 allows a player to play comfortably.
(4) Since the special ending effect is provided with the special music having the intro and the A melody following the intro, the special music can be continued without switching the special music when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(5) A special ending effect is produced after starting the execution of the intro of the special music, before finishing the execution of the intro of the special music, and before starting the A melody of the special music. , the rush sound can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(6) In the special ending effect, the execution of the rushing voice ends at the same time as the execution of the intro of the special music ends. You can feel it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(7) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the special music is finished, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. The right-handed instruction voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(8) Since the right-handed instruction sound terminates the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.
(9) The special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil-type or stuffed animal-type special ending effect that executes a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. Since it is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

(10) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 provide a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the opening progression process. Since the progress processing is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The timing of switching from the intro to the A melody in devil-type or stuffed animal-type music is different from the timing of switching from the intro to the A-melody in angel-type music, so the pachinko machine 10 should diversify special ending effects. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

(12) Angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type special ending effects are equipped with angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type rushing voices optimized for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(13) The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music, and starts execution of effects during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music. A voice storage area 93b for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body type right-handed instruction sounds is provided. Properly start execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type right-handed instruction sounds during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type music be able to.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the third embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration time of 2 seconds has elapsed.
In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 62 does not set the opening/closing door 38b to the open state only when the upper limit duration time has elapsed.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the third embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the big winning opening opening process is different from that in the third embodiment.
The contents of the big winning opening opening process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1002, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1003, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1004, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1005, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC at step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "best result", the MPU 62, like the 14th or less round game, 8 game balls which is the upper limit is entered into the big prize winning opening 38a, or the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state when 30 sec, which is the upper limit continuous time, elapses.
In addition, after the opening and closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening time of the shortest round game required until the opening and closing door 38b is set to the closed state again by allowing the upper limit of 8 game balls to enter the big winning opening 38a is about 5 sec. The opening time of the round game is increased by, for example, stopping the shooting of the game balls and delaying the time required for the upper limit of eight game balls to enter the big winning hole 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the third embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the opening progress process and the closing progress process are different from those in the third embodiment. The contents of the opening progress processing and the closing progress processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Open progress processing>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of opening progress processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes opening progress processing when recognizing that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In this opening progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2314B as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 differs from the third embodiment in that it executes the processes of steps S2312D and S2313D instead of the processes of steps S2312B and S2313B.

In step S2312D, the MPU 92 executes music determination processing. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song.
In step S2313D, the MPU 92 executes right-handed instruction sound determination processing. In the process of determining the right-handed instruction voice, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to select the effect type after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. A corresponding right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) is selected, and data setting corresponding to the right-handed instruction sound is executed.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects. Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. Fig. 55(c) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is the stuffed animal type in the type determination processing. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the music and sound effects based on the HWD recording data written in the 1st to 3rd CH areas of the HWD area 922A3.

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the music selected in the music determination process of step S2312D.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2, thereby transferring the music (HWD recording data) stored in the ROM 93. is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type music piece (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read and written in the first channel area of the HWD area 922A3.

As for the angel type, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the intro of the music starts 4 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game. The intro period of the music is "4 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the first channel area of the HWD area 922A3.

As for the devil type, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the intro of the music starts 3 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game. The intro period of the music is "5 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type music (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the first CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed animal type, as shown in FIG. 55(c), the intro of the music starts 5 seconds after starting the fifteenth round game. The intro period of the music is "3 sec", and after the intro of the music is finished, the A melody of the music is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type are common in that the intro of the music is finished 8 seconds after the 15th round game is started, and then the A melody of the music is started. ing.
Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", after setting the open/close door 38b to the open state, the upper limit of eight The shortest opening time of the round game required until the opening/closing door 38b is closed again after the game ball enters the big winning hole 38a is about 5 seconds. Then, the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the opening and closing processing of the big winning opening is usually triggered by the lapse of the waiting time (specific time) for the ending of 4 seconds after the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) has ended. Since it shifts to the control state, the shortest time from the start of the 15th round game to the shift to the normal control state is about 9 seconds.
Therefore, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type always start the intro of the music at the end of the 15th round game.

On the other hand, in the 15th round game when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 puts the upper limit of 8 game balls into the big winning mouth as in the 14th round game and below. 38a, or when the upper limit duration time of 30 seconds has passed, the opening and closing door 38b is set to the open state. It is unknown whether or not the intro of the music has ended (whether or not the A melody of the music has started) at the end of .
It should be noted that FIG. 55 shows a timing chart in the case where the intro of the music has not ended at the end of the 15th round game.

In the present embodiment, angel type, devil type, and stuffed animal type are set with a delay time of 4 seconds for angel type, 3 seconds for devil type, and 5 seconds for stuffed animal type before starting the intro of the music. After 8 seconds from the start of the 15th round game, the intro of the music is finished, and then the A melody of the music is started, but the timing of switching from the intro of the music to the A melody does not have to be the same. .
Further, in the present embodiment, the time from the start of the 15th round game to the start of the intro of the song is a delay time. Alternatively, the intro of the song may be repeatedly inserted.

In addition, the control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the right-handed instruction sound selected in the right-handed instruction sound determination processing in step S2313D.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2 to obtain the sound effects (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. ) is read and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the right-handed instruction sound (sound effect) for the presentation after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, which is stored in the ROM 93, and writes it to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is different from the third embodiment in that it is based on the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As for the angel type, as shown in FIG. 55(a), after 4 seconds from the start of the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil-type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

As for the devil type, as shown in FIG. 55(b), after 4 seconds from the start of the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed toy type, as shown in FIG. 55(c), after 4 sec from the start of the standby time for the ending, the right-handed instruction voice is started. The period of the right-handed instruction voice is "1 sec".

Thus, in this embodiment, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type are 4 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending, that is, at the end of the waiting time for the ending (at the time of transition to the normal control state). It is common in that the right-handed instruction voice is started at .

<Close progress processing>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of closing progress processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes closing progress processing when recognizing that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state. In this closing progress process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2501 to S2512D as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 processes step S2512D when determining that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or greater than "2" in step S2511B (when determining that the number of times the round game is executed is the 15th time). is different from the third embodiment in that

In step S2512D, the MPU 92 executes rushing voice decision processing.
In the following, the process of determining the rushing sound will be described in detail.

<Decision processing of rush sound>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of determination processing of rushing voice.
In the inrush voice decision process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2701D to S2703D as shown in FIG.

In step S2701D, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time of the intro of the song, and determines whether or not this remaining time is 2 seconds or longer.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more, in step S2702D, the MPU 92 executes normal rush voice setting processing. In the normal rush voice setting process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, and corresponds to the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select the rush sound to be played, and execute data setting according to the rush sound.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects when normal rush sound setting processing is executed. Specifically, FIG. 58(a) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. Fig. 58(c) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is the stuffed animal type in the type determination processing. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the music and sound effects based on the HWD recording data written in the 1st CH area to the 3rd CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
In FIG. 58, in the 15th round game, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and after 6 seconds, the upper limit of 8 game balls is entered into the big winning hole 38a, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. The timing chart is shown assuming that the setting is set to . In other words, in FIG. 58, the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 seconds or longer (2 seconds).

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the rush sound selected in the normal rush sound determination process of step S2702D.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2 to obtain the sound effects (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. ) is read and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads out the sound (sound effect) that enters the presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode stored in the ROM 93, and writes it to the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, the normal rush sound determination process in this embodiment differs from the effect sound determination process in the third embodiment in that the start timing of the rush sound is based on the start time of the intro of the music.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 58(a), starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the intro of the music. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The devil type, as shown in FIG. 58(b), starts the intro of the music and 3.5 seconds later, the rushing voice starts. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed animal type, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the rushing voice is started 1.5 seconds after the intro of the music is started. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is not longer than 2 seconds, in step S2703D it executes setting processing of the delayed rush sound. In the setting processing of the delayed entry sound, the MPU 92 refers to the recording data for HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93, and corresponds to the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode determined in step S2311B. Select the rush sound to be played, and execute data setting according to the rush sound.
Further, the MPU 92 executes sound control of the speaker section 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

Here, the data setting executed in the normal rush sound setting process in step S2702D and the data setting executed in the delayed rush sound setting process in step S2703D are different from each other.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a timing chart of music and sound effects when setting processing for delayed rush sound is executed. Specifically, FIG. 59(a) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is determined to be an angel type in the type determination process, and FIG. Fig. 59(c) is a timing chart when it is determined that the type is the stuffed animal type in the type determination processing. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the music and sound effects based on the HWD recording data written in the 1st to 3rd CH areas of the HWD area 922A3.
In FIG. 59, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state in the 15th round game, and after 9 seconds have elapsed, the upper limit of 8 game balls is entered into the big winning hole 38a, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. A timing chart is shown assuming that the setting is set to . In other words, in FIG. 59, the remaining time of the intro of the song is less than 2 sec (-1 sec).

The control core 921 of the MPU 92 executes data setting for the register 922A of the sound output core 922 according to the rush sound selected in the delay rush sound determination process of step S2703D.
Then, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2 to obtain the sound effects (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93. ) is read and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3. Specifically, the data transfer unit 922D reads the sound (sound effect) that enters the presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode stored in the ROM 93, and writes it to the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.
As described above, the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds are included in the time data of the sequence data. Also, the pitch, volume, tone color, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing are included in the sound quality data of the parameter data. Further, the normal rush sound determination process in this embodiment differs from the effect sound determination process in the third embodiment in that the start timing of the rush sound is based on the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in the type determination process that it is an angel type, the data transfer unit 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the angel-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

The angel type, as shown in FIG. 59(a), starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that the character is of the devil type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the devil-type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

For the devil type, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the rushing voice starts after 2.5 seconds from the start of the waiting time for the ending. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

If the type determination process determines that it is a stuffed animal type, the data transfer section 922D refers to the sequence data written in the sequence area 922A1 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 922A2. , the stuffed toy type rushing voice (recorded data for HWD) stored in the ROM 93 is read out and written in the second CH area of the HWD area 922A3.

In the stuffed animal type, as shown in FIG. 59(c), the rushing voice is started after 2.5 seconds from the start of the standby time for the ending. The duration of the inrush voice is "1.5 sec".

In the present embodiment, the data transfer unit 922D writes music in the 1st CH area of the HWD area 922A3, writes rush sound in the 2nd CH area, and writes right-handed instruction sound in the 3rd CH area. However, it may be written in other CH areas.
Also, in the present embodiment, the music and sound effects are recorded data for HWD, but they may be rectangular wave data for SCM.

After executing the process of step S2702D or step S2703D, the MPU 92 ends the process of determining the rushing sound, as shown in FIG.

<About the flow of the special ending>
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect and the setting processing of the normal rush sound is executed. In FIG. 60, timing charts for the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 60A shows the display screen G before the opening/closing execution mode ends.
FIG. 60(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 60(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 60(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.
In this embodiment, as described above, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed toy type end the intro of the song 8 seconds after starting the 15th round game, and then start the A melody of the song. , and 4 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending, it is common that the right-handed instruction voice is started, so only the flow of the special ending effect when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect is illustrated. and explain.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 60, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2310B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), the MPU 92 determines the type selection effect. Execute the process. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when determining that the round game execution count is the 14th, the MPU 102 displays the round game execution count at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "ROUND14" are displayed (see FIG. 60(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 60, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern display device 47 causes the display screen G to display an angel character.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2511B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), it determines the type confirmation effect. Execute the process. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode has been completed is determined to be the angel type. (See FIG. 60(B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2311B, the type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type). Then, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2312D and a right-handed instruction voice determination process in step S2313D. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the process of determining the right-handed instruction voice, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to determine the effect type after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. A corresponding right-handed instruction voice is selected, and data setting corresponding to the right-handed instruction voice is executed.

Also, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the song selected in step S2312D and the right-handed instruction voice selected in step S2313D. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the right-handed instruction voice.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 60(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music four seconds after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music 8 seconds after starting the 15th round game, and then starts the A melody of the music.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 60(B).

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2511B (when it determines that the round game execution count is the 15th time), the determination processing of rush sound is performed. Run. In this intrusion sound determination process, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time of the intro of the song in step S2701D, and determines whether or not this remaining time is 2 seconds or longer. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more, in step S2702D, the MPU 92 executes normal rush voice setting processing. If it is determined that the time is not longer than 2 seconds, then in step S2703D, processing for setting the delayed rush sound is executed.

The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 60, the 15th round game ends after 5 seconds from the start of the 15th round game, so the MPU 92 executes the setting processing of normal rush sound. Specifically, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode, the start timing of the rush sound is 2.5 seconds after the start of the intro of the music, and the rush sound is , "Angel mode rush!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the introductory voice 2.5 seconds after starting the intro of the music.
Here, since the duration of the rushing sound is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing sound at the same time when the intro of the music ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending ends, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 60(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 60(D).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 60, since the angel type is selected as the effect type after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the waiting time for the ending and, after 4 seconds, starts the right-handed instruction sound.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is uttered by the voice of an angel character, saying "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after the end of the waiting time for the ending.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect and the setting process of the delayed rush sound is executed. In FIG. 61, the opening/closing execution mode, waiting time for ending, and timing charts during variable display are shown below the display screen G, and a black dot indicating the current timing is attached to the timing chart.

Specifically, FIG. 61A is a diagram showing the display screen G before the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
FIG. 61(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the rushing voice is output. FIG. 61(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the waiting time for the ending. FIG. 61(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the right-handed instruction voice is output.
In this embodiment, as described above, the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type end the intro of the song 8 seconds after starting the 15th round game, and then start the A melody of the song. , and 4 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending, it is common to start the right-handed instruction voice, so only the flow of the special ending effect when the angel type is selected in the type selection effect is illustrated. and explain.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A character indicating the number of times the round game is executed (for example, "ROUND1" in the case of the first round game) is displayed at the upper left position, and the round game is started. In the example of FIG. 61, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The result indicates the "best result".

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that an opening command has been received, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". do. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2304, normal Determining processing of opening effect is executed. In this normal opening effect determination processing, the MPU 92 refers to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal opening effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the open state. Select a production pattern.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal opening effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal opening command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2306B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2310B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2310B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or less), the MPU 92 determines the type selection effect. Execute the process. In this type selection effect determination processing, by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, the player is informed that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Select a performance pattern corresponding to the type selection performance for selecting the type of.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type selection effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type selection command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image notifying the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and also causes the symbol display device 47 to display an image at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. to update and display the characters indicating the number of times the round game is executed. Since the MPU 92 executes the type selection effect when determining that the round game execution count is the 14th, the MPU 102 displays the round game execution count at the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The characters "ROUND14" are displayed (see FIG. 61(A)).

In the type selection effect, the player presses the push button 25b to select an angel type (see FIG. 26(A)), a devil type (see FIG. 26(B)), and a stuffed animal type (see FIG. 26(C)). can be switched, and the type of presentation after the end of the open/close execution mode can be selected. In the example of FIG. 61, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern display device 47 causes the display screen G to display an angel character.

Also, as described above, in the open/close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2501 that the closing command has been received, in step S2502 it determines whether the game result is the "best result". judge. After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", it determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B. Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 13 times or less), in step S2504, normal Execute the closing effect determination process. In this normal closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93 to correspond to the normal closing effect of informing the player that the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state. Select a production pattern.

Further, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal closing effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal closing command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state (not shown).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "3" or more in step S2506B (when it determines that the number of round game executions is 14 or more), in step S2511B , determines whether the value of the round counter RC is greater than or equal to "2". Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2511B that the value of the round counter RC is "2" or more (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is 14 times or less), it determines the type confirmation effect. Execute the process. In this type confirmation effect determination process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93, and ends the opening/closing execution mode. To select a performance pattern corresponding to a type-determined performance for determining the type of subsequent performance.

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the type confirmation effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the type confirmation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 enlarges the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby notifying the player that the type of effect after the opening/closing execution mode has been completed is determined to be the angel type. (See FIG. 61(B)).

After that, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2310B (when it determines that the number of executions of the round game is the 15th time), in step S2311B, the type (angel type, devil type, and plush toy type). Then, the MPU 92 executes a song determination process in step S2312D and a right-handed instruction voice determination process in step S2313D. In the music determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the sound storage area 93a of the ROM 93, thereby determining the music corresponding to the type of presentation after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. , and perform data settings according to the song. In the process of determining the right-handed instruction voice, the MPU 92 refers to the recorded data for the HWD pre-stored in the voice storage area 93b of the ROM 93 to determine the effect type after the opening/closing execution mode ends determined in step S2311B. A corresponding right-handed instruction voice is selected, and data setting corresponding to the right-handed instruction voice is executed.

Also, in step S2314B, the MPU 92 sets a special ending command including information related to the song selected in step S2312D and the right-handed instruction voice selected in step S2313D. This special ending command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.
Based on the special ending command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect based on the music selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 and the right-handed instruction voice.

In the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music, as shown in FIG. 61(A).
Specifically, the MPU 92 starts the intro of the music four seconds after starting the fifteenth round game.
Here, since the period of the intro of the music is "4 sec", the MPU 92 ends the intro of the music 8 seconds after starting the 15th round game, and then starts the A melody of the music.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the rush sound to the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 61(B).

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not "2" or more in step S2511B (when it determines that the round game execution count is the 15th time), the determination processing of rush sound is performed. Run. In this intrusion sound determination process, the MPU 92 calculates the remaining time of the intro of the song in step S2701D, and determines whether or not this remaining time is 2 seconds or more. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2701D that the remaining time of the intro of the music is 2 sec or more, in step S2702D, the MPU 92 executes normal rush voice setting processing. If it is determined that the time is not longer than 2 seconds, then in step S2703D, processing for setting the delayed rush sound is executed.

The output start timing of the rush sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 61, the 15th round game ends after 9 seconds from the start of the 15th round game, so the MPU 92 executes the setting process of the delayed entry sound. Specifically, since the angel type is selected as the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the start timing of the rush sound is 2.5 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. , "Angel mode rush!" In other words, the MPU 92 starts the rushing voice 2.5 seconds after starting the waiting time for the ending.
Here, since the duration of the rushing voice is "1.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the rushing voice at the same time when the waiting time for the ending ends.

Also, in the special ending effect, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the type of effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays an effect around the angel character displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the characters "Enter angel mode!" on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. By doing so, the player is notified that the type of presentation after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the angel type.

After that, when the waiting time for the ending is over, the MPU 102 displays an image instructing the player to hit to the right at the upper right position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 61(C). At the same time, the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in reduced display arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is started.

Furthermore, in the special ending effect, the MPU 92 starts the right-handed instruction sound for the effect after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 61(D).
The output start timing of the right-handed instruction sound is included in the time data of the sequence data, as described above. In the example of FIG. 61, since the angel type is selected as the effect type after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the start timing of the right-handed instruction voice is 4 seconds after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the MPU 92 starts the waiting time for the ending and, after 4 seconds, starts the right-handed instruction sound.
Here, the right-handed instruction voice is uttered by the voice of an angel character, saying "Right-handed!".
Since the duration of the right-handed instruction voice is "0.5 sec", the MPU 92 ends the right-handed instruction voice 0.5 seconds after the end of the waiting time for the ending.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 92 repeatedly outputs the music started with the special ending effect. In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which are shifted after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the MPU 102 mainly displays the flying image of the angel character at the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2601 that the ending command has been received (when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and the waiting time for the ending is started), in step S2602 , determines whether or not the game result is the "best result". When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2603, the MPU 92 executes normal ending effect determination processing. In this normal ending effect determination process, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 to select an effect pattern corresponding to the normal ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Also, the MPU 102 causes the pattern display device 47 to execute the normal ending effect selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 based on the normal ending command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has ended (not shown).

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2602 that the game result is the "best result" (when causing the symbol display device 47 to execute a special ending effect), the ending progress processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening progress process is performed before the normal control state is started (before the waiting time for the ending ends), and at the same time, the stay period variable control state (the 15th It functions as a state-to-state continuation performance execution unit that executes a state-to-state continuation performance (special ending performance) that starts execution of performance after starting a round game and continues execution of performance even after starting a normal control state. .

Further, in this embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter. It functions as opening/closing ball entry means for putting out a predetermined game ball at the time. In the open/close execution mode, one game (round game) is performed from setting the variable winning device 38 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again, and after setting the variable winning device 38 to the open state, It is provided with a final specific game (15th round game) that is set to a closed state again after a stay period that varies according to the conditions. In the opening progression process, after starting the final specific game, execution of the effect is started before finishing the final specific game.

In this embodiment, the stay period variation control state is the 15th round game, but it may be the 14th round game, or may be the waiting time for the ending. In short, the stay period variable control state may be a state in which the stay period is changed before the normal control state is started (before the end of the waiting time for ending).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect includes an angel-type special ending effect (continuous effect between the first states) that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. It also has a devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect (continuous effect during the second state) to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the progress processing of the type selection effect is a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the opening progress process. function as
Note that, in the present embodiment, the effect executing means causes the player to select one of the plurality of types of continuous effects between states before starting the execution of the continuous effect between states by the continuation effect between states execution unit. Although the selector is provided, it may not be provided. In other words, there may be one type of inter-state continuation effect.

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is provided with an angel-type song (first special song) having an intro (music introduction) and an A melody (music main body) following the intro. . The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type has an intro (music introduction part) and the A melody (music body part) that follows the intro, and the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody is different from that of the angel type songs. Alternatively, a stuffed toy type music (second special music) is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect is performed after starting the execution of the intro of the angel-type song and before ending the execution of the intro of the angel-type song. An angel-type rush sound (first sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the music. The special ending effect for devil-type or stuffed animal-type music begins after the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music has started, and before the intro of the devil-type or stuffed-type music ends, A devil type or stuffed toy type rushing sound (second sound effect for music) is provided for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the A melody of the devil type or stuffed toy type music.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the angel-type special ending effect, the execution of the angel-type rushing voice is completed at the same time as the execution of the intro of the angel-type music is completed. In the special ending effect of the devil type or the stuffed animal type, the execution of the intro of the devil type or the stuffed animal type music is finished, and at the same time the execution of the devil type or the stuffed animal type rushing sound is finished.
In the present embodiment, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music sound effects at the same time as the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music ends. It is only necessary that the execution of the production is finished at .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rush sound determination process determines whether or not the execution of the music sound effects can be finished after the 15th round game is finished and before the execution of the intro of the special music is started. It functions as an execution determination unit that Then, in the normal rush sound setting process, when it is determined in the rush sound determination process that the execution of the music sound effect can be finished, the execution of the intro of the special music is started, and then the intro of the special music is executed. It functions as a normal execution unit that starts execution of the sound effect for music before the end, and the setting processing of the delayed rush sound determines that the execution of the sound effect for the music cannot be ended in the rush sound determination processing. After starting the execution of the introduction of the special music, it functions as an extraordinary execution part that does not start the execution of the sound effect for the music before finishing the execution of the introduction of the special music.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the processing for determining the rushing sound is to calculate the remaining time of the intro of the song, and if the remaining time is 2 sec or more, the processing for setting the normal rushing sound is executed. If the above is not the case, the delayed rush sound setting process is executed, but the normal rush sound setting process and the delayed rush sound setting process may be executed based on other conditions. In short, the execution determining section may determine whether or not the execution of the music sound effects can be terminated after the stay period variation control state is terminated and before the execution of the music introduction section of the special music is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the 15th round game is finished, the setting processing of the delayed entry sound delays the execution of the sound effects for music and starts, but the execution of the sound effects for music is not started. good too. In short, the non-normal execution unit should not start executing the sound effect for music after starting the execution of the intro of the special music and before ending the execution of the intro of the special music.

Also, in the present embodiment, the special ending effect, after the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, which route of the left-handed route (first route) and the right-handed route (second route) A right-handed instruction sound (path notification sound effect) is provided to notify the player whether the game ball is to be shot toward the player. This right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after finishing the execution of the intro of the angel type, the devil type, and the stuffed animal type music, and ends the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state. .

Also, in this embodiment, the angel-type special ending effect consists of a video displaying effects around the angel character (video introduction part) and a video of the angel character flying after this video (video main part). An angel-type image (first special image) is provided. The special ending effect of the devil type or stuffed animal type is a video that displays effects around the devil or stuffed animal character (introductory video) and a video of the devil or stuffed animal character flying after this video (main video) A devil type or stuffed animal type image (second special image) is provided.

Also, in the present embodiment, the opening progression process includes the timing of ending the waiting time for the ending (the timing of shifting to the normal control state), and switching from the image displaying effects around the character to the image of the character flying. The execution of the special ending effect has been started so as to match the timing, but I tried to match the timing of switching from the intro to the A melody and the timing of switching from the image displaying the effects around the character to the image of the character flying. Execution of the special ending effect may be started at . In other words, in the angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images, the timing of switching from the image displaying the effect around the character to the image of the character flying may be different. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and can continue without switching the special video when the game state is changed, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased. can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special ending effects include special music, sound effects for music, sound effects for route notification, and special video, but other effects may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 includes a ROM 93 (continuous effect storage between states) that stores a special ending effect. The ROM 93 includes a sound storage area 93a (music storage section) for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music (special music), Voice storage for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type rushing voices (sound effects) for starting execution of the production, and angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instruction voices (sound effects) and an area 93b (sound effect storage section).
In this embodiment, the ROM 93 includes a music storage section for storing information related to special music and a sound effect storage section for storing information related to sound effects. Information related to a special music piece into which a sound effect for starting execution is inserted may be stored in a single storage unit.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 stay before starting the normal control state, and start executing the effect after starting the 15th round game in which the staying period varies, and normal Since the opening progress processing for executing the special ending performance for continuing the execution of the performance even after starting the control state is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The 15th round game ends after a stay period that varies according to predetermined conditions, and the opening progression process is performed after the 15th round game is started and before the 15th round game is finished. Since the execution of the performance is started, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(3) Since the special ending effect is provided with the special music having the intro and the A melody following the intro, the special music can be continued without switching the special music when the game state is changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(4) The special ending effect is to start executing the effect after the intro of the special music starts and before the intro of the special music ends, and before the A melody of the special music starts. , the rush sound can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(5) In the special ending effect, the execution of the rushing voice ends at the same time as the execution of the intro of the special music ends. You can feel it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(6) When the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 determine that the execution of the music sound effect can be finished in the rush sound determination process, the normal rush sound for starting the execution of the music sound effect If it is determined that the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be finished in the decision processing of the rush sound, and the decision processing of the delayed rush sound that does not start the execution of the sound effect for music is provided. When the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be finished before the execution of the A melody of the special music is started due to the lengthening of the stay time of the 15th round game, the effect for music is set in the determination processing of the delayed entry sound. You can prevent the sound from starting to run. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(7) Since the determination processing of the delayed entry sound starts after the 15th round game is completed, the execution of the music sound effect is delayed and started. When the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be finished before starting the execution of the A melody of the music, the execution of the sound effect for music can be delayed and started by the delay rush sound determination processing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(8) The right-handed instruction voice starts the execution of the effect after the execution of the intro of the special music is finished, and ends the execution of the effect after the transition to the normal control state. The right-handed instruction voice can be executed without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(9) Since the right-handed instruction sound terminates the execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state, the pachinko machine 10 can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.
(10) In the opening progression process, execution of the special ending effect is started so as to match the timing of transition to the normal control state with the timing of switching from the image displaying the effects around the character to the image of the character flying. , the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the scene of the special video. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(11) The special ending effects include an angel-type special ending effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a devil-type or stuffed animal-type special ending effect that executes a different type of effect from the angel-type special ending effect. Since it is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the special ending effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.
(12) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform a type selection effect that allows the player to select one of a plurality of types of special ending effects before starting execution of the special ending effect in the opening progression process. Since the progress processing is provided, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(13) Angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type special ending effects are equipped with angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type rushing voices optimized for angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type songs. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow players to play comfortably.

(14) The ROM 93 has a sound storage area 93a for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music, and starts execution of effects during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type music. Since it is provided with a voice storage area 93b for storing information related to angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type incoming voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body type right-handed instruction sounds, the opening progression process can be performed by: Appropriately start execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rush voices and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type right-handed instruction sounds during execution of angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-type music be able to.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, and not more than n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the shooting cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any of the "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result" Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.
On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the game result.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The game state transition means is
After completing the specific control state, the normal control state transition section (at the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process and the opening and closing execution mode migration process),
The production executing means is
After ending the specific control state, execution of the performance is started before the specified time elapses, and continuous performance between states (special ending performance) is executed to continue the performance even after the specified time elapses. A game machine characterized by comprising a state-to-state continuation performance executing section (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments).

According to the feature A1 of the group of the present invention, the effect executing means starts executing the effect before the specific time elapses after the specific control state is ended, and continues the inter-state continuous effect even after the specific time elapses. Since it has a state-to-state continuation effect executing part for executing, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
A gaming machine comprising a special song (angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) following the song introduction part.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect includes a special music having a music introduction part and a music body part following the music introduction part, so that the special music is switched when the game state is changed. can continue without Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music main body section. game machine.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music body section. Therefore, the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 or feature A3 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, the performance is started, and the execution of the main music part of the special music is started. A gaming machine comprising musical sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing sounds) for terminating performance execution previously.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation production starts execution of production after starting execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for music is ended simultaneously with the end of execution of the music introduction part of the special music.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music and at the same time ends the execution of the music sound effects, so that the player can switch the melody of the special music. It is possible to experience both the timing and the timing of the end of the music sound effect.
Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player of which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts performing the performance after finishing the performance of the music introduction part of the special music, and finishes the performance after shifting to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
Special images (angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images) having an image introductory portion (image displaying effects around the character) and an image main portion (image of the character in flight) following the introductory image portion. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A7 of the group of the present inventions, the state-to-state continuation effect is provided with a special video having a video introduction portion and a video body portion following the video introduction portion, so that the special video is switched when the game state is changed. can continue without Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, the following problems can be solved because the player can play the game comfortably.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
State-to-state continuation effect execution unit ( A game machine characterized by comprising the opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments).

According to the feature B1 of the group of the present invention, the effect executing means starts executing the effect before ending the specific control state, and executes the state-to-state continuous effect in which the effect continues to be executed even after the specific control state is ended. Since the inter-state continuation effect execution part is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again is regarded as one game (round game), and a predetermined time elapses after the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only the event as an opportunity,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the specific game of the round, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
A gaming machine comprising a special song (angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) following the song introduction part.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect includes a special music having a music introduction part and a music body part following the music introduction part, so that the special music is switched when the game state is changed. can continue without Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
The state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music main body section. game machine.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state with the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music body section. Therefore, the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 or feature B4 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, the performance is started, and the execution of the main music part of the special music is started. A gaming machine comprising musical sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing sounds) for terminating performance execution previously.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect starts execution of the effect after starting execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for music is ended simultaneously with the end of execution of the music introduction part of the special music.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and the execution of the music sound effects at the same time. It is possible to experience both the timing and the timing of the end of the music sound effect.
Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B3 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player of which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature B7 of the group of inventions, the route notification sound effect starts performing the performance after the music introduction part of the special music ends, and finishes the performance after shifting to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B7 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
Special images (angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images) having an image introductory portion (image displaying effects around the character) and an image main portion (image of the character in flight) following the introductory image portion. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B8 of the group of the present inventions, the state-to-state continuation effect includes a special video having a video introduction portion and a video body portion following the video introduction portion, so that the special video is switched when the game state is changed. can continue without Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The game state transition means is
After completing the specific control state, the normal control state transition section (at the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process and the opening and closing execution mode migration process),
The production executing means is
After the specific control state is terminated, execution of the performance is started before the specified time elapses, and execution of the performance is continued even after the specified time elapses. A state-to-state continuous effect execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments) that executes
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect (angel-type special ending effect) for executing a predetermined type of effect;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a second state-to-state continuation effect (devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect) for executing a type of effect different from the first state-to-state continuation effect type.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, after the specific control state ends, the effect executing means starts executing the effect before the specific time elapses, and continues even after the specific time elapses. Since a state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing a state-to-state continuation performance is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the inter-state continuation effect includes a first inter-state continuation effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuation effect type. , the gaming machine can diversify the inter-state continuation effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the result of internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the start ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
Execution of performance is started before ending the specific control state, and continuous performance between states (special ending performance) is executed to continue execution of performance even after the end of the specific control state. Equipped with an execution unit (opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments),
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect (angel-type special ending effect) for executing a predetermined type of effect;
The game machine is characterized by comprising a second state-to-state continuation effect (devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect) for executing a type of effect different from the first state-to-state continuation effect type.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the effect executing means starts executing the effect before ending the specific control state, and continues to execute the effect even after ending the specific control state. Since a state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing performance is provided, performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the inter-state continuation effect includes a first inter-state continuation effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuation effect type. , the gaming machine can diversify the inter-state continuation effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again is regarded as one game (round game), and a predetermined time elapses after the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only the event as an opportunity,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has passed, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the specific game of the round, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C4.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the result of internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the start ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
While staying before starting the normal control state, after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates, execution of the production is started, and the normal control A state-to-state continuation performance execution unit (open progress processing of the fifth embodiment) that executes a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation performances (special ending performance) that continues the performance even after the state is started,
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect (angel-type special ending effect) for executing a predetermined type of effect;
The game machine is characterized by comprising a second state-to-state continuation effect (devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect) for executing a type of effect different from the first state-to-state continuation effect type.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period variable control state in which the stay period fluctuates. To continue the performance without switching the performance when the game state is shifted, since a state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation performances for continuing the execution of the performance even after starting the control state is provided. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the inter-state continuation effect includes a first inter-state continuation effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuation effect type. , the gaming machine can diversify the inter-state continuation effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is set. Equipped with a final specific game (15th round game) that is set to a closed state again after a variable stay period,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after the stay period fluctuates according to a predetermined condition, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the final specific game, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C5 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Before the execution of the inter-state continuation production is started by the inter-state continuation production execution unit, a continuous production selection unit (type selection production progress processing) that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation production ) is provided.

According to feature C6 of the group of the present invention, the effect execution means allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects before the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts executing the inter-state continuous effect. Since the game machine is provided with the continuous effect selection part that allows the game to be played, the game machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The first state-to-state continuation effect is
A first special song (angel type song) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) following the song introduction part,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
It has a music introduction part (intro) and a music body part (A melody) that follows the music introduction part, and the second special music has a different timing of switching from the music introduction part to the music body part from the first special music. A gaming machine characterized by having a special song (devil-type or stuffed toy-type song).

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, the first state-to-state continuation effect and the second state-to-state continuation effect include a first special music piece and a second special music piece having a music introduction portion and a music body portion following the music introduction portion. special music, it is possible to continue without switching the special music when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the timing of switching from the music introduction portion to the music main body portion in the second special music is different from the timing of switching from the music introduction portion to the music main body portion in the first special music, the gaming machine performs the inter-state continuation effect. It can be diversified, and the attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C7 of the invention group,
The continuation effect between the first states is
After starting execution of the music introduction part of the first special music, starting execution of the production before ending execution of the music introduction part of the first special music, and performing the first special music Equipped with a first music effect sound (angel type rushing sound) that ends the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
After starting execution of the music introduction part of the second special music, starting execution of the production before ending execution of the music introduction part of the second special music, and performing the second special music A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second musical effect sound (devil type or stuffed animal type rushing sound) for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the main body of the musical piece.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect starts execution of the effect after starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
Further, the first inter-state continuation effect and the second inter-state continuation effect are the first special music sound and the second music sound effect optimized for the second special music. , the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 of the invention group,
The first state-to-state continuation effect is
Ending the execution of the first music sound effect at the same time as ending the execution of the music introduction part of the first special music,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for the second music is finished at the same time as the execution of the music introduction part of the second special music is finished.

According to feature C9 of the present invention group, the first state-to-state continuation effect and the second state-to-state continuation effect are performed at the same time when the music introduction part of the first special music and the second special music is completed. Since the execution of the sound effect for music and the sound effect for second music is completed, the player can determine the timing of switching the melody of the first special music and the first special music, and the sound effect for first music. and the timing of the end of the second sound effect for music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C7 to feature C9 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player of which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature C10 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts performing the performance after finishing the performance of the music introduction part of the special music, and finishes the performance after shifting to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10 of the invention group,
The continuation effect between the first states is
A first special image (angel type image) having an image introduction portion (image displaying effects around the character) and a main image portion (image of the character in flight) following the image introduction portion,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
A second special image (devil type or stuffed animal type image) having an image introduction portion (image displaying effects around the character) and an image main portion (image of the character flying) following the image introduction portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuation effect and the second inter-state continuation effect are the first special video and the second special video having the video introduction part and the video main part following the video introduction part. , the game can be continued without switching the special video when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, the following problem can be solved because the player can play the game comfortably.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The game state transition means is
After completing the specific control state, the normal control state transition section (at the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process and the opening and closing execution mode migration process),
The production executing means is
After the specific control state is terminated, execution of the performance is started before the specified time elapses, and execution of the performance is continued even after the specified time elapses. A state-to-state continuation effect execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments) that executes
Before the execution of the inter-state continuation production is started by the inter-state continuation production execution unit, a continuous production selection unit (type selection production progress processing) that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation production ) and
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect (angel-type special ending effect) for executing a predetermined type of effect;
a second state-to-state continuation effect (devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect) for executing a type of effect different from the first state-to-state continuation effect type;
The game machine is characterized in that the inter-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the production when the player selects one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation effects by the continuation effect selection section.

According to feature D1 of the group of the present invention, after the specific control state is ended, the effect executing means starts executing the effect before the specific time elapses, and continues even after the specific time elapses. Since a state-to-state continuation performance executing section for executing a state-to-state continuation performance is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the inter-state continuation effect includes a first inter-state continuation effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuation effect type. , the gaming machine can diversify the inter-state continuation effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

Furthermore, the effect execution means includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects before the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts execution of the inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts execution of the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation effects in the continuation effect selection unit, the gaming machine allows the player to You can play comfortably.

Feature D2.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
Execution of performance is started before ending the specific control state, and execution of performance is continued even after the end of the specific control state. Continuous performance between states to execute a plurality of types of continuous performances between states (special ending performance). an execution unit (opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments);
Before the execution of the inter-state continuation production is started by the inter-state continuation production execution unit, a continuous production selection unit (type selection production progress processing) that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation production ) and
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect (angel-type special ending effect) for executing a predetermined type of effect;
a second state-to-state continuation effect (devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect) for executing a type of effect different from the first state-to-state continuation effect type;
The game machine is characterized in that the inter-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the production when the player selects one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation effects by the continuation effect selection section.

According to feature D2 of the group of the present invention, the production execution means starts execution of production before ending the specific control state, and continues execution of production even after ending the specific control state. Since a state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing performance is provided, performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the inter-state continuation effect includes a first inter-state continuation effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuation effect type. , the gaming machine can diversify the inter-state continuation effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

Furthermore, the effect execution means includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects before the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts execution of the inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts executing the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation effects in the continuation effect selection unit, the gaming machine allows the player to You can play comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again is regarded as one game (round game), and a predetermined time elapses after the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only the event as an opportunity,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the specific game of the round, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D4.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
While staying before starting the normal control state, after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates, execution of the production is started, and the normal control A state-to-state continuation effect execution unit (opening progress processing of the fifth embodiment) that executes a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation effects (special ending effects) that continues the execution of the effect even after the state is started;
Before the execution of the inter-state continuation production is started by the inter-state continuation production execution unit, a continuous production selection unit (type selection production progress processing) that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation production ) and
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect (angel-type special ending effect) for executing a predetermined type of effect;
a second state-to-state continuation effect (devil type or stuffed animal type special ending effect) for executing a type of effect different from the first state-to-state continuation effect type;
The game machine is characterized in that the inter-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the production when the player selects one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation effects by the continuation effect selection section.

According to feature D4 of the group of the present invention, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period variation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. To continue the performance without switching the performance when the game state is shifted, since a state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation performances for continuing the execution of the performance even after starting the control state is provided. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the inter-state continuation effect includes a first inter-state continuation effect that executes a predetermined type of effect, and a second inter-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first inter-state continuation effect type. , the gaming machine can diversify the inter-state continuation effect and improve the attention of the player to the game.

Furthermore, the effect execution means includes a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuous effects before the inter-state continuous effect execution unit starts execution of the inter-state continuous effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts executing the effect when the player selects one of a plurality of types of state-to-state continuation effects in the continuation effect selection unit, the gaming machine allows the player to You can play comfortably.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in feature D4 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is set. Equipped with a final specific game (15th round game) that is set to a closed state again after a variable stay period,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the final specific game, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5 of the present invention group,
The first state-to-state continuation effect is
A first special song (angel type song) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) following the song introduction part,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
It has a music introduction part (intro) and a music body part (A melody) that follows the music introduction part, and the second special music has a different timing of switching from the music introduction part to the music body part from the first special music. A gaming machine characterized by having a special song (devil-type or stuffed toy-type song).

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the first state-to-state continuation effect and the second state-to-state continuation effect include a first special music piece and a second special music piece having a music introduction portion and a music body portion following the music introduction portion. special music, it is possible to continue without switching the special music when shifting the game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the timing of switching from the music introduction part to the music body part in the second special music is different from that in the first special music, the gaming machine can diversify the state-to-state continuation effect, and the player can play the game. You can improve the attention to.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the invention group,
The first state-to-state continuation effect is
After starting execution of the music introduction part of the first special music, starting execution of the production before ending execution of the music introduction part of the first special music, and performing the first special music Equipped with a first music effect sound (angel type rushing sound) that ends the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
After starting execution of the music introduction part of the second special music, starting execution of the production before ending execution of the music introduction part of the second special music, and performing the second special music A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second musical effect sound (devil type or stuffed animal type rushing sound) for ending the execution of the performance before starting the execution of the main body of the musical piece.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect starts execution of the effect after starting execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, the first inter-state continuation effect and the second inter-state continuation effect are the first special music sound and the second music sound effect optimized for the second special music. , the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in feature D7 of the invention group,
The continuation effect between the first states is
Ending the execution of the first music sound effect at the same time as ending the execution of the music introduction part of the first special music,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for the second music is finished at the same time as the execution of the music introduction part of the second special music is finished.

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the first state-to-state continuation effect and the second state-to-state continuation effect are performed at the same time when the music introduction part of the first special music and the second special music ends. Since the execution of the sound effect for music and the sound effect for second music is completed, the player can determine the timing of switching the melody of the first special music and the first special music, and the sound effect for first music. and the timing of the end of the second sound effect for music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D6 to D8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player of which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type right-handed instruction voice),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature D9 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts performing the performance after the music introduction part of the special music is finished, and finishes the performance after shifting to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9 of the invention group,
The first state-to-state continuation effect is
A first special image (angel-type image) having an image introduction portion (image displaying an effect around the character) and a main image portion (image of the character in flight) following the image introduction portion,
The second state-to-state continuation effect is
A second special image (devil type or stuffed animal type image) having an image introduction portion (image displaying effects around the character) and an image main portion (image of the character flying) following the image introduction portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D10 of the present invention group, the first inter-state continuation effect and the second inter-state continuation effect are the first special video and the second special video having the video introduction part and the video main part following the video introduction part. , the game can be continued without switching the special video when the game state is changed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Feature group E> Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The game state transition means is
After completing the specific control state, the normal control state transition section (at the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process and the opening and closing execution mode migration process),
The production executing means is
After ending the specific control state, execution of the performance is started before the specified time elapses, and continuous performance between states (special ending performance) is executed to continue the performance even after the specified time elapses. State-to-state continuation effect execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments);
A state-to-state continuation effect storage unit (ROM93) that stores the state-to-state continuation effect,
The continuous effect between states is
Equipped with special songs (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) that follows the song introduction part,
The state-to-state continuation performance storage unit
a music storage unit (sound storage area 93a) for storing information related to the special music;
Stores information related to sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body-type right-handed instruction sounds) for starting the execution of the performance during the execution of the special music. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a sound effect storage unit (voice storage area 93b).

According to feature E1 of the group of the present invention, after the specific control state ends, the effect execution means starts executing the effect before the specific time elapses, and continues after the specific time elapses. is provided, the performance can be continued without switching the performance when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the inter-state continuation effect storage unit includes a music storage unit that stores information related to special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to sound effects, the inter-state continuation effect execution unit Execution of sound effects can be appropriately started during execution of special music.

Feature E2.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
State-to-state continuation effect execution unit ( opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments);
A state-to-state continuation effect storage unit (ROM93) that stores the state-to-state continuation effect,
The continuous effect between states is
Equipped with special songs (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) that follows the song introduction part,
The state-to-state continuation performance storage unit
a music storage unit (sound storage area 93a) for storing information related to the special music;
Stores information related to sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body-type right-handed instruction sounds) for starting the execution of the performance during the execution of the special music. and a sound effect storage unit (voice storage area 93b).

According to feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the effect execution means starts the execution of the effect before ending the specific control state, and executes the state-to-state continuous effect that continues the execution of the effect even after the specific control state is ended. Since the inter-state continuation effect execution part is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the inter-state continuation effect storage unit includes a music storage unit that stores information related to special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to sound effects, the inter-state continuation effect execution unit Execution of sound effects can be appropriately started during execution of special music.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again is regarded as one game (round game), and a predetermined time elapses after the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only the event as an opportunity,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game, and then the final Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the specific game of the round, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E4.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
While staying before starting the normal control state, after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates, execution of the production is started, and the normal control A state-to-state continuation effect execution unit (open progress processing of the fifth embodiment) that executes a state-to-state continuation effect (special ending effect) that continues the execution of the effect even after the state is started;
A state-to-state continuation effect storage unit (ROM93) that stores the state-to-state continuation effect,
The continuous effect between states is
Equipped with special songs (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) that follows the song introduction part,
The state-to-state continuation performance storage unit
a music storage unit (sound storage area 93a) for storing information related to the special music;
Stores information related to sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing voices, and angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed-body-type right-handed instruction sounds) for starting the execution of the performance during the execution of the special music. and a sound effect storage unit (voice storage area 93b).
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period variation control state in which the stay period changes, and normal Since the state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing the state-to-state continuation performance for continuing the execution of the performance even after the start of the control state is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the inter-state continuation effect storage unit includes a music storage unit that stores information related to special music and a sound effect storage unit that stores information related to sound effects, the inter-state continuation effect execution unit Execution of sound effects can be appropriately started during execution of special music.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in feature E4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is set. Equipped with a final specific game (15th round game) that is set to a closed state again after a variable stay period,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the final specific game, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
The state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music main body section. game machine.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state with the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music body section. Therefore, the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E6 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, the performance is started, and the execution of the main music part of the special music is started. A gaming machine comprising musical sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and stuffed animal-type rushing sounds) for terminating performance execution previously.

According to feature E7 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect starts execution of the effect after starting execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in feature E7 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for music is ended simultaneously with the end of execution of the music introduction part of the special music.

According to feature E8 of the group of the present inventions, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and the execution of the music sound effects at the same time. It is possible to experience both the timing and the timing of the end of the music sound effect.
Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instructional voices),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature E9 of the group of inventions, the route notification sound effect starts executing the presentation after finishing the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Feature group F> Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The game state transition means is
After completing the specific control state, the normal control state transition section (at the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process and the opening and closing execution mode migration process),
The production executing means is
After ending the specific control state, execution of the performance is started before the specified time elapses, and continuous performance between states (special ending performance) is executed to continue the performance even after the specified time elapses. State-to-state continuation effect execution unit (ending progress processing of the first and second embodiments);
A state-to-state continuation effect storage unit (ROM93A) that stores the state-to-state continuation effect,
The continuous effect between states is
Equipped with special songs (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) that follows the song introduction part,
The state-to-state continuation performance storage unit
The above-mentioned special in which a sound effect (an angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type rushing voice, and an angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instruction voice) for starting the execution of the production during the execution of the special music is inserted. A gaming machine characterized by storing information related to music.

According to the feature F1 of the group of the present invention, the effect executing means starts executing the effect before the specific time elapses after the specific control state is terminated, and continues the inter-state continuous effect even after the specific time elapses. is provided, the performance can be continued without switching the performance when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the inter-state continuation effect storage unit stores information related to the special music in which a sound effect for starting the execution of the effect during execution of the special music is inserted, the inter-state continuation effect execution unit can properly start running sound effects.

Feature F2.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
State-to-state continuation effect execution unit ( opening progress processing of the third and fourth embodiments);
A state-to-state continuation effect storage unit (ROM93A) that stores the state-to-state continuation effect,
The continuous effect between states is
Equipped with special songs (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) that follows the song introduction part,
The state-to-state continuation performance storage unit
The above-mentioned special in which a sound effect (an angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type rushing voice, and an angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instruction voice) for starting the execution of the production during the execution of the special music is inserted. A gaming machine characterized by storing information related to music.

According to the feature F2 of the group of the present invention, the effect execution means starts the execution of the effect before ending the specific control state, and executes the state-to-state continuous effect that continues the execution of the effect even after the specific control state is ended. Since the inter-state continuation effect execution part is provided, the effect can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the inter-state continuation effect storage unit stores information related to the special music in which a sound effect for starting the execution of the effect during execution of the special music is inserted, the inter-state continuation effect execution unit can properly start running sound effects.

Feature F3.
In the game machine described in feature F2 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again is regarded as one game (round game), and a predetermined time elapses after the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state. Equipped with the final specific game (15th round game) that is set to the closed state again with only the event as an opportunity,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends only when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the state-to-state continuous effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the specific game of the round, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F4.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
While staying before starting the normal control state, after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates, execution of the production is started, and the normal control A state-to-state continuation effect execution unit (open progress processing of the fifth embodiment) that executes a state-to-state continuation effect (special ending effect) that continues the execution of the effect even after the state is started;
A state-to-state continuation effect storage unit (ROM93A) that stores the state-to-state continuation effect,
The continuous effect between states is
Equipped with special songs (angel type, devil type, and stuffed toy type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) that follows the song introduction part,
The state-to-state continuation performance storage unit
The above-mentioned special in which a sound effect (an angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type rushing voice, and an angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instruction voice) for starting the execution of the production during the execution of the special music is inserted. A gaming machine characterized by storing information related to music.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period variation control state in which the stay period changes, and the normal Since the state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing the state-to-state continuation performance for continuing the execution of the performance even after the start of the control state is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the inter-state continuation effect storage unit stores information related to the special music in which a sound effect for starting the execution of the effect during execution of the special music is inserted, the inter-state continuation effect execution unit can properly start running sound effects.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again, one round game is defined. Equipped with a final specific game (15th round game) that is set to a closed state again after a variable stay period,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the final specific game, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5 of the present invention group,
The state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to coincide with the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music main body section. game machine.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect execution section starts execution of the state-to-state continuation effect so as to match the timing of shifting to the normal control state and the timing of switching from the music introduction section to the music body section. Therefore, the player can experience both the timing of switching the game state and the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, the performance is started, and the execution of the main music part of the special music is started. A gaming machine comprising musical sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed animal type rushing sounds) for terminating performance execution previously.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect starts execution of the effect after starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F8.
In the game machine described in feature F7 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for music is ended simultaneously with the end of execution of the music introduction part of the special music.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and the execution of the music sound effects at the same time. It is possible to experience both the timing and the timing of the end of the music sound effect.
Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instructional voices),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature F9 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts performing the performance after the music introduction part of the special music is finished, and finishes the performance after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Feature G Group> Feature G1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and effect execution means (sound emission) for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The production executing means is
While staying before starting the normal control state, after starting the stay period fluctuation control state (15th round game of the fifth embodiment) in which the stay period fluctuates, execution of the production is started, and the normal control The game machine is characterized by comprising a state-to-state continuation performance executing section (open progress processing of the fifth embodiment) for executing a state-to-state continuation performance (special ending performance) for continuing execution of performance even after the state is started.

According to feature G1 of the group of the present invention, the effect executing means stays before starting the normal control state, and starts executing the effect after starting the stay period variation control state in which the stay period fluctuates. Since the state-to-state continuation performance executing part for executing the state-to-state continuation performance for continuing the execution of the performance even after the start of the control state is provided, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The game in the specific control state is
After setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state, until the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the closed state again, one game (round game) is set. Equipped with a final specific game (15th round game) that is set to a closed state again after a variable stay period,
The inter-state continuation effect execution unit
A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect before ending the final specific game after starting the final specific game.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the final specific game ends after a stay period that varies according to a predetermined condition, and the state-to-state continuation effect execution unit starts the final specific game. Since the execution of the performance is started before finishing the final specific game, the performance can be continued without switching when the game state is shifted. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
A gaming machine comprising a special song (angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type songs) having a song introduction part (intro) and a song body part (A melody) following the song introduction part.

According to feature G3 of the present invention group, the state-to-state continuation effect includes a special music having a music introduction part and a music body part following the music introduction part, so that the special music is switched when the game state is changed. can continue without Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
After starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music, the performance is started, and the execution of the main music part of the special music is started. A gaming machine comprising musical sound effects (angel type, devil type, and stuffed animal type rushing sounds) for terminating performance execution previously.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation production starts execution of the production after starting the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and before ending the execution of the music introduction part of the special music. Since the sound effect for music is provided for ending the execution of the production before starting the execution of the main body of the music, the sound effect for music can be executed without overlapping the timing of switching the melody of the special music. . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G4 of the invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the sound effect for music is ended simultaneously with the end of execution of the music introduction part of the special music.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the inter-state continuation effect ends the execution of the music introduction part of the special music and the execution of the music sound effect at the same time, so that the player can switch the melody of the special music. It is possible to experience both the timing and the timing of the end of the music sound effect.
Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G4 or feature G5 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
After the stay period variation control state is ended and before the execution of the music body part of the special music is started, the execution determination unit (the inrush voice) that determines whether the execution of the music sound effect can be finished setting process) and
When the execution determination unit determines that the execution of the sound effect for music can be finished, after starting the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music, the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music is finished. A normal execution unit (normal rush sound setting process) for starting execution of the music sound effect before
When the execution determination unit determines that the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be finished, after starting the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music, the execution of the music introduction portion of the special music is finished. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an unusual execution unit (delayed entry sound setting processing) that does not start execution of the music sound effect before.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the effect execution means includes: a normal execution section for starting execution of the sound effect for music when the execution determination section determines that execution of the sound effect for music can be terminated; The non-normal execution unit does not start the execution of the sound effect for music when the determination unit determines that the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be terminated. To prevent execution of sound effects for music from being started in an extraordinary execution part when execution of sound effects for music cannot be finished before starting execution of the main part of the music of special music due to prolonged execution. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G6 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the non-normal execution unit delays execution of the sound effect for music after the stay period variation control state ends.

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the non-normal execution unit delays execution of the sound effect for music after ending the stay period variation control state. If the execution of the sound effect for music cannot be finished before starting the execution of the main body of the special music due to a prolonged period of time, the execution of the sound effect for music can be delayed and started in the non-normal execution part. can. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part,
The continuous effect between states is
After the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, for informing the player which of the first route and the second route the game ball is to be shot. Equipped with sound effects (angel-type, devil-type, and plush-type right-handed instructional voices),
The route notification sound effect is
A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect after finishing execution of the music introduction part of the special music, and ending execution of the effect after shifting to the normal control state.

According to feature G8 of the present invention group, the route notification sound effect starts performing the performance after the music introduction part of the special music is finished, and finishes the performance after the transition to the normal control state. Therefore, the inter-state continuation effect can execute the route notification sound effect without overlapping with the timing of switching the melody of the special music. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.
In addition, since the effect sound for route notification ends the execution of the presentation after shifting to the normal control state, the game machine can prevent erroneous information to be given to the player.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8 of the present invention group,
The continuous effect between states is
Special images (angel-type, devil-type, and plush toy-type images) having an image introductory portion (image displaying effects around the character) and an image main portion (image of the character in flight) following the introductory image portion. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G9 of the present invention group, since the state-to-state continuation effect includes a special video having a video introduction part and a video main part following the video introduction part, the special video is switched when the game state is changed. can continue without Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, the gaming machine separately executes the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state.

However, when the effects of the normal control state and the effects of the specific control state are executed separately, these effects are switched when the game state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine has a problem that it is impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out mouth, 47... pattern display device, 60... main control device, 62... MPU, 90... sound emission control device,
92...MPU, 100...Display control device, 102...MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a starting ball entry for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. and a game state transition for shifting the game state from a normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. means, and an effect execution means for executing the effects of the normal control state and the specific control state,
The game state transition means is
A normal control state transition unit that transitions to the normal control state when a specific time has elapsed after the specific control state ends,
The production executing means is
After the specific control state is finished, the performance is started before the specified time elapses, and the performance is continued even after the specified time elapses. a continuous production execution unit;
a continuous effect selection unit that allows the player to select one of the plurality of types of continuous effects between states before starting execution of the continuous effect between states in the continuous effect execution unit between states,
The continuous effect between states is
a first state-to-state continuation effect for executing a predetermined type of effect;
a second state-to-state continuation effect that executes a different type of effect from the first state-to-state continuation effect type;
The game machine is characterized in that the inter-state continuation effect execution unit starts execution of the effect when the player selects one of the plurality of types of inter-state continuation effects by the continuation effect selection unit.

Images